Mercurial > emacs
annotate src/dispnew.c @ 32162:a2d9d6410ef5
Revived
author | Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org> |
---|---|
date | Thu, 05 Oct 2000 05:49:45 +0000 |
parents | 081edde76197 |
children | 20788c8274cd |
rev | line source |
---|---|
314 | 1 /* Updating of data structures for redisplay. |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
2 Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 87, 88, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 1999 |
18853
4501a367a887
(direct_output_forward_char): Reenable check against
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18774
diff
changeset
|
3 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
314 | 4 |
5 This file is part of GNU Emacs. | |
6 | |
7 GNU Emacs is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify | |
8 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by | |
1777
4edfaa19c7a7
* window.c (window_internal_width): New function.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1766
diff
changeset
|
9 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) |
314 | 10 any later version. |
11 | |
12 GNU Emacs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, | |
13 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of | |
14 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the | |
15 GNU General Public License for more details. | |
16 | |
17 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | |
18 along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING. If not, write to | |
14186
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
19 the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, |
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
20 Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ |
314 | 21 |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
22 #include <config.h> |
314 | 23 #include <signal.h> |
7900
60795e826dad
Put stdio.h after config.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7814
diff
changeset
|
24 #include <stdio.h> |
314 | 25 #include <ctype.h> |
26 | |
21514 | 27 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H |
28 #include <unistd.h> | |
29 #endif | |
30 | |
3525
58e789baa27a
Include lisp.h earlier (before termhooks.h).
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3517
diff
changeset
|
31 #include "lisp.h" |
314 | 32 #include "termchar.h" |
33 #include "termopts.h" | |
2198 | 34 #include "termhooks.h" |
13526
34382f4e23cb
Always include dispextern.h before cm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13448
diff
changeset
|
35 /* cm.h must come after dispextern.h on Windows. */ |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
36 #include "dispextern.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
37 #include "cm.h" |
314 | 38 #include "buffer.h" |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
39 #include "charset.h" |
31093
6da961dff718
Include keyboard.h before frame.h.
Andrew Innes <andrewi@gnu.org>
parents:
30720
diff
changeset
|
40 #include "keyboard.h" |
764 | 41 #include "frame.h" |
314 | 42 #include "window.h" |
43 #include "commands.h" | |
44 #include "disptab.h" | |
45 #include "indent.h" | |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
46 #include "intervals.h" |
15065 | 47 #include "blockinput.h" |
21514 | 48 #include "process.h" |
314 | 49 |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
50 /* I don't know why DEC Alpha OSF1 fail to compile this file if we |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
51 include the following file. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
52 /* #include "systty.h" */ |
12917 | 53 #include "syssignal.h" |
554 | 54 |
314 | 55 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS |
56 #include "xterm.h" | |
25012 | 57 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ |
314 | 58 |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
59 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
60 #include "w32term.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
61 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
62 |
25012 | 63 /* Include systime.h after xterm.h to avoid double inclusion of time.h. */ |
64 | |
7808
52e2eb6245d4
Include systime.h after xterm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7648
diff
changeset
|
65 #include "systime.h" |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
66 #include <errno.h> |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
67 |
25012 | 68 /* To get the prototype for `sleep'. */ |
69 | |
70 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H | |
71 #include <unistd.h> | |
72 #endif | |
73 | |
314 | 74 #define max(a, b) ((a) > (b) ? (a) : (b)) |
75 #define min(a, b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b)) | |
76 | |
77 /* Get number of chars of output now in the buffer of a stdio stream. | |
25012 | 78 This ought to be built in in stdio, but it isn't. Some s- files |
79 override this because their stdio internals differ. */ | |
80 | |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
81 #ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__ |
25012 | 82 |
83 /* The s- file might have overridden the definition with one that | |
84 works for the system's C library. But we are using the GNU C | |
85 library, so this is the right definition for every system. */ | |
86 | |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
87 #ifdef GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
88 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
89 #else |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
90 #undef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
91 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->__bufp - (FILE)->__buffer) |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
92 #endif |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
93 #else /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
94 #if !defined (PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) && HAVE_STDIO_EXT_H && HAVE___FPENDING |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
95 #include <stdio_ext.h> |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
96 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) __fpending (FILE) |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
97 #endif |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
98 #ifndef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
314 | 99 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->_ptr - (FILE)->_base) |
100 #endif | |
25012 | 101 #endif /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
102 | |
29437 | 103 #if defined (LINUX) && defined (HAVE_LIBNCURSES) |
104 #include <term.h> /* for tgetent */ | |
105 #endif | |
25012 | 106 |
107 /* Structure to pass dimensions around. Used for character bounding | |
108 boxes, glyph matrix dimensions and alike. */ | |
109 | |
110 struct dim | |
111 { | |
112 int width; | |
113 int height; | |
114 }; | |
115 | |
116 | |
117 /* Function prototypes. */ | |
118 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
119 static void redraw_overlapping_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
120 static void redraw_overlapped_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 121 static int count_blanks P_ ((struct glyph *, int)); |
122 static int count_match P_ ((struct glyph *, struct glyph *, | |
123 struct glyph *, struct glyph *)); | |
124 static unsigned line_draw_cost P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int)); | |
125 static void update_frame_line P_ ((struct frame *, int)); | |
126 static struct dim allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay | |
127 P_ ((Lisp_Object, int, int, struct dim, int, int *)); | |
128 static void allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct window *, | |
129 struct dim)); | |
130 static int realloc_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *, struct dim)); | |
131 static void adjust_frame_glyphs P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
132 struct glyph_matrix *new_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
133 static void free_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
134 static void adjust_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_matrix *, | |
135 int, int, struct dim)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
136 static void change_frame_size_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int, int, int, int)); |
25012 | 137 static void swap_glyph_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); |
30323
4cd1b8fe118c
(direct_output_for_insert): Remove confusing
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30307
diff
changeset
|
138 #ifdef GLYPH_DEBUG |
25012 | 139 static int glyph_row_slice_p P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); |
30323
4cd1b8fe118c
(direct_output_for_insert): Remove confusing
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30307
diff
changeset
|
140 #endif |
25012 | 141 static void fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); |
142 static void build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
143 struct window *)); | |
144 static void build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
145 struct window *)); | |
146 static struct glyph_pool *new_glyph_pool P_ ((void)); | |
147 static void free_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
148 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_initially P_ ((void)); | |
149 static void adjust_frame_message_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
150 static void adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
151 static void fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *)); | |
152 static void build_frame_matrix P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
153 void clear_current_matrices P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
154 void scroll_glyph_matrix_range P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int, | |
155 int, int)); | |
156 static void clear_window_matrices P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
157 static void fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
158 static int scrolling_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
159 static int update_window_line P_ ((struct window *, int, int *)); |
25012 | 160 static void update_marginal_area P_ ((struct window *, int, int)); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
161 static int update_text_area P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 162 static void make_current P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, struct glyph_matrix *, |
163 int)); | |
164 static void mirror_make_current P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
165 void check_window_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct window *)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
166 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
25012 | 167 static void check_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, |
168 struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
169 #endif |
25012 | 170 static void mirror_line_dance P_ ((struct window *, int, int, int *, char *)); |
171 static int update_window_tree P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
172 static int update_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
173 static int update_frame_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int)); | |
174 static void set_window_cursor_after_update P_ ((struct window *)); | |
175 static int row_equal_p P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_row *, | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
176 struct glyph_row *, int)); |
25012 | 177 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); |
178 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
179 static void reverse_rows P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int)); | |
180 static int margin_glyphs_to_reserve P_ ((struct window *, int, Lisp_Object)); | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
181 static void sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows P_ ((struct window *)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
182 struct window *frame_row_to_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 183 |
184 | |
185 | |
186 /* Non-zero means don't pause redisplay for pending input. (This is | |
187 for debugging and for a future implementation of EDT-like | |
188 scrolling. */ | |
189 | |
190 int redisplay_dont_pause; | |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
191 |
554 | 192 /* Nonzero upon entry to redisplay means do not assume anything about |
764 | 193 current contents of actual terminal frame; clear and redraw it. */ |
314 | 194 |
764 | 195 int frame_garbaged; |
314 | 196 |
25012 | 197 /* Nonzero means last display completed. Zero means it was preempted. */ |
314 | 198 |
199 int display_completed; | |
200 | |
25012 | 201 /* Lisp variable visible-bell; enables use of screen-flash instead of |
202 audible bell. */ | |
314 | 203 |
204 int visible_bell; | |
205 | |
764 | 206 /* Invert the color of the whole frame, at a low level. */ |
314 | 207 |
208 int inverse_video; | |
209 | |
210 /* Line speed of the terminal. */ | |
211 | |
212 int baud_rate; | |
213 | |
25012 | 214 /* Either nil or a symbol naming the window system under which Emacs |
215 is running. */ | |
314 | 216 |
217 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system; | |
218 | |
219 /* Version number of X windows: 10, 11 or nil. */ | |
25012 | 220 |
314 | 221 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system_version; |
222 | |
25012 | 223 /* Vector of glyph definitions. Indexed by glyph number, the contents |
224 are a string which is how to output the glyph. | |
314 | 225 |
226 If Vglyph_table is nil, a glyph is output by using its low 8 bits | |
25012 | 227 as a character code. |
228 | |
229 This is an obsolete feature that is no longer used. The variable | |
230 is retained for compatibility. */ | |
314 | 231 |
232 Lisp_Object Vglyph_table; | |
233 | |
234 /* Display table to use for vectors that don't specify their own. */ | |
235 | |
236 Lisp_Object Vstandard_display_table; | |
237 | |
25012 | 238 /* Nonzero means reading single-character input with prompt so put |
239 cursor on mini-buffer after the prompt. positive means at end of | |
240 text in echo area; negative means at beginning of line. */ | |
241 | |
314 | 242 int cursor_in_echo_area; |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
243 |
30720
64f3338f72d8
(Qredisplay_dont_pause): New variable.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30713
diff
changeset
|
244 Lisp_Object Qdisplay_table, Qredisplay_dont_pause; |
25012 | 245 |
314 | 246 |
25012 | 247 /* The currently selected frame. In a single-frame version, this |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
248 variable always equals the_only_frame. */ |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
249 |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
250 Lisp_Object selected_frame; |
25012 | 251 |
252 /* A frame which is not just a mini-buffer, or 0 if there are no such | |
764 | 253 frames. This is usually the most recent such frame that was |
9572 | 254 selected. In a single-frame version, this variable always holds |
255 the address of the_only_frame. */ | |
25012 | 256 |
257 struct frame *last_nonminibuf_frame; | |
258 | |
259 /* Stdio stream being used for copy of all output. */ | |
260 | |
261 FILE *termscript; | |
262 | |
263 /* Structure for info on cursor positioning. */ | |
264 | |
265 struct cm Wcm; | |
266 | |
267 /* 1 means SIGWINCH happened when not safe. */ | |
268 | |
269 int delayed_size_change; | |
270 | |
271 /* 1 means glyph initialization has been completed at startup. */ | |
272 | |
273 static int glyphs_initialized_initially_p; | |
274 | |
275 /* Updated window if != 0. Set by update_window. */ | |
276 | |
277 struct window *updated_window; | |
278 | |
279 /* Glyph row updated in update_window_line, and area that is updated. */ | |
280 | |
281 struct glyph_row *updated_row; | |
282 int updated_area; | |
283 | |
284 /* A glyph for a space. */ | |
285 | |
286 struct glyph space_glyph; | |
287 | |
288 /* Non-zero means update has been performed directly, so that there's | |
289 no need for redisplay_internal to do much work. Set by | |
290 direct_output_for_insert. */ | |
291 | |
292 int redisplay_performed_directly_p; | |
293 | |
294 /* Counts of allocated structures. These counts serve to diagnose | |
295 memory leaks and double frees. */ | |
296 | |
297 int glyph_matrix_count; | |
298 int glyph_pool_count; | |
299 | |
300 /* If non-null, the frame whose frame matrices are manipulated. If | |
301 null, window matrices are worked on. */ | |
302 | |
303 static struct frame *frame_matrix_frame; | |
304 | |
305 /* Current interface for window-based redisplay. Set from init_xterm. | |
306 A null value means we are not using window-based redisplay. */ | |
307 | |
308 struct redisplay_interface *rif; | |
309 | |
310 /* Non-zero means that fonts have been loaded since the last glyph | |
311 matrix adjustments. Redisplay must stop, and glyph matrices must | |
312 be adjusted when this flag becomes non-zero during display. The | |
313 reason fonts can be loaded so late is that fonts of fontsets are | |
314 loaded on demand. */ | |
315 | |
316 int fonts_changed_p; | |
317 | |
318 /* Convert vpos and hpos from frame to window and vice versa. | |
319 This may only be used for terminal frames. */ | |
320 | |
321 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
322 | |
323 static int window_to_frame_vpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
324 static int window_to_frame_hpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
325 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) window_to_frame_vpos ((W), (VPOS)) | |
326 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) window_to_frame_hpos ((W), (HPOS)) | |
327 | |
328 #else /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
329 | |
330 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) ((VPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->top)) | |
331 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) ((HPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->left)) | |
332 | |
333 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
334 | |
335 | |
336 /* Like bcopy except never gets confused by overlap. Let this be the | |
337 first function defined in this file, or change emacs.c where the | |
338 address of this function is used. */ | |
314 | 339 |
340 void | |
341 safe_bcopy (from, to, size) | |
342 char *from, *to; | |
343 int size; | |
344 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
345 if (size <= 0 || from == to) |
314 | 346 return; |
347 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
348 /* If the source and destination don't overlap, then bcopy can |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
349 handle it. If they do overlap, but the destination is lower in |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
350 memory than the source, we'll assume bcopy can handle that. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
351 if (to < from || from + size <= to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
352 bcopy (from, to, size); |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
353 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
354 /* Otherwise, we'll copy from the end. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
355 else |
314 | 356 { |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
357 register char *endf = from + size; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
358 register char *endt = to + size; |
314 | 359 |
360 /* If TO - FROM is large, then we should break the copy into | |
361 nonoverlapping chunks of TO - FROM bytes each. However, if | |
362 TO - FROM is small, then the bcopy function call overhead | |
363 makes this not worth it. The crossover point could be about | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
364 anywhere. Since I don't think the obvious copy loop is too |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
365 bad, I'm trying to err in its favor. */ |
314 | 366 if (to - from < 64) |
367 { | |
368 do | |
369 *--endt = *--endf; | |
370 while (endf != from); | |
371 } | |
372 else | |
373 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
374 for (;;) |
314 | 375 { |
376 endt -= (to - from); | |
377 endf -= (to - from); | |
378 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
379 if (endt < to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
380 break; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
381 |
314 | 382 bcopy (endf, endt, to - from); |
383 } | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
384 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
385 /* If SIZE wasn't a multiple of TO - FROM, there will be a |
25012 | 386 little left over. The amount left over is (endt + (to - |
387 from)) - to, which is endt - from. */ | |
314 | 388 bcopy (from, to, endt - from); |
389 } | |
390 } | |
391 } | |
392 | |
25012 | 393 |
394 | |
395 /*********************************************************************** | |
396 Glyph Matrices | |
397 ***********************************************************************/ | |
398 | |
399 /* Allocate and return a glyph_matrix structure. POOL is the glyph | |
400 pool from which memory for the matrix should be allocated, or null | |
401 for window-based redisplay where no glyph pools are used. The | |
402 member `pool' of the glyph matrix structure returned is set to | |
403 POOL, the structure is otherwise zeroed. */ | |
404 | |
405 struct glyph_matrix * | |
406 new_glyph_matrix (pool) | |
407 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
408 { | |
409 struct glyph_matrix *result; | |
410 | |
411 /* Allocate and clear. */ | |
412 result = (struct glyph_matrix *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
413 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
414 | |
415 /* Increment number of allocated matrices. This count is used | |
416 to detect memory leaks. */ | |
417 ++glyph_matrix_count; | |
418 | |
419 /* Set pool and return. */ | |
420 result->pool = pool; | |
421 return result; | |
422 } | |
423 | |
424 | |
425 /* Free glyph matrix MATRIX. Passing in a null MATRIX is allowed. | |
426 | |
427 The global counter glyph_matrix_count is decremented when a matrix | |
428 is freed. If the count gets negative, more structures were freed | |
429 than allocated, i.e. one matrix was freed more than once or a bogus | |
430 pointer was passed to this function. | |
431 | |
432 If MATRIX->pool is null, this means that the matrix manages its own | |
433 glyph memory---this is done for matrices on X frames. Freeing the | |
434 matrix also frees the glyph memory in this case. */ | |
435 | |
436 static void | |
437 free_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
438 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
439 { | |
440 if (matrix) | |
441 { | |
442 int i; | |
443 | |
444 /* Detect the case that more matrices are freed than were | |
445 allocated. */ | |
446 if (--glyph_matrix_count < 0) | |
447 abort (); | |
448 | |
449 /* Free glyph memory if MATRIX owns it. */ | |
450 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
451 for (i = 0; i < matrix->rows_allocated; ++i) | |
452 xfree (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]); | |
453 | |
454 /* Free row structures and the matrix itself. */ | |
455 xfree (matrix->rows); | |
456 xfree (matrix); | |
457 } | |
458 } | |
459 | |
460 | |
461 /* Return the number of glyphs to reserve for a marginal area of | |
462 window W. TOTAL_GLYPHS is the number of glyphs in a complete | |
463 display line of window W. MARGIN gives the width of the marginal | |
464 area in canonical character units. MARGIN should be an integer | |
465 or a float. */ | |
466 | |
467 static int | |
468 margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, total_glyphs, margin) | |
469 struct window *w; | |
470 int total_glyphs; | |
471 Lisp_Object margin; | |
472 { | |
473 int n; | |
474 | |
475 if (NUMBERP (margin)) | |
476 { | |
477 int width = XFASTINT (w->width); | |
478 double d = max (0, XFLOATINT (margin)); | |
479 d = min (width / 2 - 1, d); | |
480 n = (int) ((double) total_glyphs / width * d); | |
481 } | |
482 else | |
483 n = 0; | |
484 | |
485 return n; | |
486 } | |
487 | |
488 | |
489 /* Adjust glyph matrix MATRIX on window W or on a frame to changed | |
490 window sizes. | |
491 | |
492 W is null if the function is called for a frame glyph matrix. | |
493 Otherwise it is the window MATRIX is a member of. X and Y are the | |
494 indices of the first column and row of MATRIX within the frame | |
495 matrix, if such a matrix exists. They are zero for purely | |
496 window-based redisplay. DIM is the needed size of the matrix. | |
497 | |
498 In window-based redisplay, where no frame matrices exist, glyph | |
499 matrices manage their own glyph storage. Otherwise, they allocate | |
500 storage from a common frame glyph pool which can be found in | |
501 MATRIX->pool. | |
502 | |
503 The reason for this memory management strategy is to avoid complete | |
504 frame redraws if possible. When we allocate from a common pool, a | |
505 change of the location or size of a sub-matrix within the pool | |
506 requires a complete redisplay of the frame because we cannot easily | |
507 make sure that the current matrices of all windows still agree with | |
508 what is displayed on the screen. While this is usually fast, it | |
509 leads to screen flickering. */ | |
510 | |
511 static void | |
512 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, x, y, dim) | |
513 struct window *w; | |
514 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
515 int x, y; | |
516 struct dim dim; | |
517 { | |
518 int i; | |
519 int new_rows; | |
520 int marginal_areas_changed_p = 0; | |
25546 | 521 int header_line_changed_p = 0; |
522 int header_line_p = 0; | |
25012 | 523 int left = -1, right = -1; |
524 int window_x, window_y, window_width, window_height; | |
525 | |
526 /* See if W had a top line that has disappeared now, or vice versa. */ | |
527 if (w) | |
528 { | |
25546 | 529 header_line_p = WINDOW_WANTS_HEADER_LINE_P (w); |
530 header_line_changed_p = header_line_p != matrix->header_line_p; | |
25012 | 531 } |
25546 | 532 matrix->header_line_p = header_line_p; |
25012 | 533 |
534 /* Do nothing if MATRIX' size, position, vscroll, and marginal areas | |
535 haven't changed. This optimization is important because preserving | |
536 the matrix means preventing redisplay. */ | |
537 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
538 { | |
539 window_box (w, -1, &window_x, &window_y, &window_width, &window_height); | |
540 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->left_margin_width); | |
541 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->right_margin_width); | |
542 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
543 marginal_areas_changed_p = (left != matrix->left_margin_glyphs | |
544 || right != matrix->right_margin_glyphs); | |
545 | |
546 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
547 && !fonts_changed_p | |
25546 | 548 && !header_line_changed_p |
25012 | 549 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) |
550 && matrix->window_height == window_height | |
551 && matrix->window_vscroll == w->vscroll | |
552 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
553 return; | |
554 } | |
555 | |
556 /* Enlarge MATRIX->rows if necessary. New rows are cleared. */ | |
557 if (matrix->rows_allocated < dim.height) | |
558 { | |
559 int size = dim.height * sizeof (struct glyph_row); | |
560 new_rows = dim.height - matrix->rows_allocated; | |
561 matrix->rows = (struct glyph_row *) xrealloc (matrix->rows, size); | |
562 bzero (matrix->rows + matrix->rows_allocated, | |
563 new_rows * sizeof *matrix->rows); | |
564 matrix->rows_allocated = dim.height; | |
565 } | |
566 else | |
567 new_rows = 0; | |
568 | |
569 /* If POOL is not null, MATRIX is a frame matrix or a window matrix | |
570 on a frame not using window-based redisplay. Set up pointers for | |
571 each row into the glyph pool. */ | |
572 if (matrix->pool) | |
573 { | |
574 xassert (matrix->pool->glyphs); | |
575 | |
576 if (w) | |
577 { | |
578 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
579 w->left_margin_width); | |
580 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
581 w->right_margin_width); | |
582 } | |
583 else | |
584 left = right = 0; | |
585 | |
586 for (i = 0; i < dim.height; ++i) | |
587 { | |
588 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[i]; | |
589 | |
590 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
591 = (matrix->pool->glyphs | |
592 + (y + i) * matrix->pool->ncolumns | |
593 + x); | |
594 | |
595 if (w == NULL | |
596 || row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
25546 | 597 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->header_line_p)) |
25012 | 598 { |
599 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
600 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
601 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
602 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
603 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
604 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
605 } | |
606 else | |
607 { | |
608 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
609 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
610 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
611 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
612 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
613 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
614 } | |
615 } | |
616 | |
617 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
618 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
619 } | |
620 else | |
621 { | |
622 /* If MATRIX->pool is null, MATRIX is responsible for managing | |
623 its own memory. Allocate glyph memory from the heap. */ | |
624 if (dim.width > matrix->matrix_w | |
625 || new_rows | |
25546 | 626 || header_line_changed_p |
25012 | 627 || marginal_areas_changed_p) |
628 { | |
629 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
630 struct glyph_row *end = row + matrix->rows_allocated; | |
631 | |
632 while (row < end) | |
633 { | |
634 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
635 = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA], | |
636 (dim.width | |
637 * sizeof (struct glyph))); | |
638 | |
639 /* The mode line never has marginal areas. */ | |
640 if (row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
25546 | 641 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->header_line_p)) |
25012 | 642 { |
643 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
644 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
645 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
646 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
647 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
648 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
649 } | |
650 else | |
651 { | |
652 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
653 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
654 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
655 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
656 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
657 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
658 } | |
659 ++row; | |
660 } | |
661 } | |
662 | |
663 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
664 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
665 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
666 } | |
667 | |
668 /* Number of rows to be used by MATRIX. */ | |
669 matrix->nrows = dim.height; | |
31932
081edde76197
(adjust_glyph_matrix, enable_glyph_matrix_rows):
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31850
diff
changeset
|
670 xassert (matrix->nrows >= 0); |
25012 | 671 |
672 /* Mark rows in a current matrix of a window as not having valid | |
673 contents. It's important to not do this for desired matrices. | |
674 When Emacs starts, it may already be building desired matrices | |
675 when this function runs. */ | |
676 if (w && matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
677 { | |
678 /* Optimize the case that only the height has changed (C-x 2, | |
679 upper window). Invalidate all rows that are no longer part | |
680 of the window. */ | |
681 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
682 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) | |
683 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
684 { | |
685 i = 0; | |
686 while (matrix->rows[i].enabled_p | |
687 && (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (matrix->rows + i) | |
688 < matrix->window_height)) | |
689 ++i; | |
690 | |
691 /* Window end is invalid, if inside of the rows that | |
692 are invalidated. */ | |
693 if (INTEGERP (w->window_end_vpos) | |
694 && XFASTINT (w->window_end_vpos) >= i) | |
695 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
696 | |
697 while (i < matrix->nrows) | |
698 matrix->rows[i++].enabled_p = 0; | |
699 } | |
700 else | |
701 { | |
702 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
703 matrix->rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
704 } | |
705 } | |
706 | |
707 /* Remember last values to be able to optimize frame redraws. */ | |
708 matrix->matrix_x = x; | |
709 matrix->matrix_y = y; | |
710 matrix->matrix_w = dim.width; | |
711 matrix->matrix_h = dim.height; | |
712 | |
713 /* Record the top y location and height of W at the time the matrix | |
714 was last adjusted. This is used to optimize redisplay above. */ | |
715 if (w) | |
716 { | |
717 matrix->window_top_y = XFASTINT (w->top); | |
718 matrix->window_height = window_height; | |
719 matrix->window_width = window_width; | |
720 matrix->window_vscroll = w->vscroll; | |
721 } | |
722 } | |
723 | |
724 | |
725 /* Reverse the contents of rows in MATRIX between START and END. The | |
726 contents of the row at END - 1 end up at START, END - 2 at START + | |
727 1 etc. This is part of the implementation of rotate_matrix (see | |
728 below). */ | |
314 | 729 |
730 static void | |
25012 | 731 reverse_rows (matrix, start, end) |
732 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
733 int start, end; | |
314 | 734 { |
25012 | 735 int i, j; |
736 | |
737 for (i = start, j = end - 1; i < j; ++i, --j) | |
738 { | |
739 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
740 initialization. */ | |
741 struct glyph_row temp; | |
742 temp = matrix->rows[i]; | |
743 matrix->rows[i] = matrix->rows[j]; | |
744 matrix->rows[j] = temp; | |
745 } | |
314 | 746 } |
747 | |
25012 | 748 |
749 /* Rotate the contents of rows in MATRIX in the range FIRST .. LAST - | |
750 1 by BY positions. BY < 0 means rotate left, i.e. towards lower | |
751 indices. (Note: this does not copy glyphs, only glyph pointers in | |
752 row structures are moved around). | |
753 | |
754 The algorithm used for rotating the vector was, I believe, first | |
755 described by Kernighan. See the vector R as consisting of two | |
756 sub-vectors AB, where A has length BY for BY >= 0. The result | |
757 after rotating is then BA. Reverse both sub-vectors to get ArBr | |
758 and reverse the result to get (ArBr)r which is BA. Similar for | |
759 rotating right. */ | |
760 | |
761 void | |
762 rotate_matrix (matrix, first, last, by) | |
763 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
764 int first, last, by; | |
314 | 765 { |
25012 | 766 if (by < 0) |
767 { | |
768 /* Up (rotate left, i.e. towards lower indices). */ | |
769 by = -by; | |
770 reverse_rows (matrix, first, first + by); | |
771 reverse_rows (matrix, first + by, last); | |
772 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
773 } | |
774 else if (by > 0) | |
314 | 775 { |
25012 | 776 /* Down (rotate right, i.e. towards higher indices). */ |
777 reverse_rows (matrix, last - by, last); | |
778 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last - by); | |
779 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
314 | 780 } |
25012 | 781 } |
782 | |
783 | |
784 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph rows of MATRIX. Do it for rows | |
785 with indices START <= index < END. Increment positions by DELTA/ | |
786 DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
787 | |
788 void | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
789 increment_matrix_positions (matrix, start, end, delta, delta_bytes) |
25012 | 790 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; |
791 int start, end, delta, delta_bytes; | |
792 { | |
793 /* Check that START and END are reasonable values. */ | |
794 xassert (start >= 0 && start <= matrix->nrows); | |
795 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
796 xassert (start <= end); | |
797 | |
798 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
799 increment_row_positions (matrix->rows + start, delta, delta_bytes); |
25012 | 800 } |
801 | |
802 | |
803 /* Enable a range of rows in glyph matrix MATRIX. START and END are | |
804 the row indices of the first and last + 1 row to enable. If | |
805 ENABLED_P is non-zero, enabled_p flags in rows will be set to 1. */ | |
806 | |
807 void | |
808 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, start, end, enabled_p) | |
809 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
810 int start, end; | |
811 int enabled_p; | |
812 { | |
31932
081edde76197
(adjust_glyph_matrix, enable_glyph_matrix_rows):
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31850
diff
changeset
|
813 xassert (start <= end); |
081edde76197
(adjust_glyph_matrix, enable_glyph_matrix_rows):
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31850
diff
changeset
|
814 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); |
081edde76197
(adjust_glyph_matrix, enable_glyph_matrix_rows):
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31850
diff
changeset
|
815 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); |
081edde76197
(adjust_glyph_matrix, enable_glyph_matrix_rows):
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31850
diff
changeset
|
816 |
25012 | 817 for (; start < end; ++start) |
818 matrix->rows[start].enabled_p = enabled_p != 0; | |
819 } | |
820 | |
821 | |
822 /* Clear MATRIX. | |
823 | |
824 This empties all rows in MATRIX by setting the enabled_p flag for | |
825 all rows of the matrix to zero. The function prepare_desired_row | |
826 will eventually really clear a row when it sees one with a zero | |
827 enabled_p flag. | |
828 | |
829 Resets update hints to defaults value. The only update hint | |
830 currently present is the flag MATRIX->no_scrolling_p. */ | |
831 | |
832 void | |
833 clear_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
834 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
835 { | |
836 if (matrix) | |
314 | 837 { |
25012 | 838 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, 0, matrix->nrows, 0); |
839 matrix->no_scrolling_p = 0; | |
314 | 840 } |
841 } | |
25012 | 842 |
843 | |
844 /* Shift part of the glyph matrix MATRIX of window W up or down. | |
845 Increment y-positions in glyph rows between START and END by DY, | |
846 and recompute their visible height. */ | |
847 | |
848 void | |
849 shift_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, start, end, dy) | |
850 struct window *w; | |
851 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
852 int start, end, dy; | |
853 { | |
854 int min_y, max_y; | |
855 | |
856 xassert (start <= end); | |
857 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
858 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
859 | |
25546 | 860 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEADER_LINE_HEIGHT (w); |
25012 | 861 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); |
862 | |
863 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
864 { | |
865 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[start]; | |
866 | |
867 row->y += dy; | |
868 | |
869 if (row->y < min_y) | |
870 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
871 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
872 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
873 else | |
874 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
875 } | |
876 } | |
877 | |
878 | |
879 /* Mark all rows in current matrices of frame F as invalid. Marking | |
880 invalid is done by setting enabled_p to zero for all rows in a | |
881 current matrix. */ | |
882 | |
883 void | |
884 clear_current_matrices (f) | |
885 register struct frame *f; | |
886 { | |
887 /* Clear frame current matrix, if we have one. */ | |
888 if (f->current_matrix) | |
889 clear_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
890 | |
891 /* Clear the matrix of the menu bar window, if such a window exists. | |
892 The menu bar window is currently used to display menus on X when | |
893 no toolkit support is compiled in. */ | |
894 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
895 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->current_matrix); | |
896 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
897 /* Clear the matrix of the tool-bar window, if any. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
898 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
899 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->current_matrix); |
25012 | 900 |
901 /* Clear current window matrices. */ | |
902 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
903 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 0); | |
904 } | |
905 | |
906 | |
907 /* Clear out all display lines of F for a coming redisplay. */ | |
314 | 908 |
21514 | 909 void |
25012 | 910 clear_desired_matrices (f) |
911 register struct frame *f; | |
314 | 912 { |
25012 | 913 if (f->desired_matrix) |
914 clear_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
915 | |
916 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
917 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->desired_matrix); | |
918 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
919 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
920 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->desired_matrix); |
25012 | 921 |
922 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
923 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
924 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
925 } | |
926 | |
927 | |
928 /* Clear matrices in window tree rooted in W. If DESIRED_P is | |
929 non-zero clear desired matrices, otherwise clear current matrices. */ | |
930 | |
931 static void | |
932 clear_window_matrices (w, desired_p) | |
933 struct window *w; | |
934 int desired_p; | |
935 { | |
936 while (w) | |
314 | 937 { |
25012 | 938 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
939 { | |
940 xassert (WINDOWP (w->hchild)); | |
941 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild), desired_p); | |
942 } | |
943 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
314 | 944 { |
25012 | 945 xassert (WINDOWP (w->vchild)); |
946 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild), desired_p); | |
947 } | |
948 else | |
949 { | |
950 if (desired_p) | |
951 clear_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
952 else | |
314 | 953 { |
25012 | 954 clear_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); |
955 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
314 | 956 } |
25012 | 957 } |
958 | |
959 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
960 } | |
961 } | |
962 | |
963 | |
964 | |
965 /*********************************************************************** | |
966 Glyph Rows | |
967 | |
968 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph rows. | |
969 ***********************************************************************/ | |
970 | |
971 /* Clear glyph row ROW. Do it in a way that makes it robust against | |
972 changes in the glyph_row structure, i.e. addition or removal of | |
973 structure members. */ | |
974 | |
975 void | |
976 clear_glyph_row (row) | |
977 struct glyph_row *row; | |
978 { | |
979 struct glyph *p[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
980 static struct glyph_row null_row; | |
981 | |
982 /* Save pointers. */ | |
983 p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
984 p[TEXT_AREA] = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
985 p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
986 p[LAST_AREA] = row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
987 | |
988 /* Clear. */ | |
989 *row = null_row; | |
990 | |
991 /* Restore pointers. */ | |
992 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
993 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] = p[TEXT_AREA]; | |
994 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
995 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] = p[LAST_AREA]; | |
30041
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
996 |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
997 #if 0 /* At some point, some bit-fields of struct glyph were not set, |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
998 which made glyphs unequal when compared with GLYPH_EQUAL_P. |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
999 Redisplay outputs such glyphs, and flickering effects were |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1000 the result. This also depended on the contents of memory |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1001 returned by xmalloc. If flickering happens again, activate |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1002 the code below If the flickering is gone with that, chances |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1003 are that the flickering has the same reason as here. */ |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1004 bzero (p[0], (char *) p[LAST_AREA] - (char *) p[0]); |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1005 #endif |
25012 | 1006 } |
1007 | |
1008 | |
1009 /* Make ROW an empty, enabled row of canonical character height, | |
1010 in window W starting at y-position Y. */ | |
1011 | |
1012 void | |
1013 blank_row (w, row, y) | |
1014 struct window *w; | |
1015 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1016 int y; | |
1017 { | |
1018 int min_y, max_y; | |
1019 | |
25546 | 1020 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEADER_LINE_HEIGHT (w); |
25012 | 1021 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); |
1022 | |
1023 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1024 row->y = y; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1025 row->ascent = row->phys_ascent = 0; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1026 row->height = row->phys_height = CANON_Y_UNIT (XFRAME (w->frame)); |
25012 | 1027 |
1028 if (row->y < min_y) | |
1029 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
1030 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
1031 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
1032 else | |
1033 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
1034 | |
1035 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1036 } | |
1037 | |
1038 | |
1039 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph row ROW. DELTA and DELTA_BYTES | |
1040 are the amounts by which to change positions. Note that the first | |
1041 glyph of the text area of a row can have a buffer position even if | |
1042 the used count of the text area is zero. Such rows display line | |
1043 ends. */ | |
1044 | |
1045 void | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
1046 increment_row_positions (row, delta, delta_bytes) |
25012 | 1047 struct glyph_row *row; |
1048 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1049 { | |
1050 int area, i; | |
1051 | |
1052 /* Increment start and end positions. */ | |
1053 MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1054 MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1055 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1056 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1057 | |
1058 /* Increment positions in glyphs. */ | |
1059 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1060 for (i = 0; i < row->used[area]; ++i) | |
1061 if (BUFFERP (row->glyphs[area][i].object) | |
1062 && row->glyphs[area][i].charpos > 0) | |
1063 row->glyphs[area][i].charpos += delta; | |
1064 | |
1065 /* Capture the case of rows displaying a line end. */ | |
1066 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] == 0 | |
1067 && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1068 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]->charpos += delta; | |
1069 } | |
1070 | |
1071 | |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1072 #if 0 |
25012 | 1073 /* Swap glyphs between two glyph rows A and B. This exchanges glyph |
1074 contents, i.e. glyph structure contents are exchanged between A and | |
1075 B without changing glyph pointers in A and B. */ | |
1076 | |
1077 static void | |
1078 swap_glyphs_in_rows (a, b) | |
1079 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1080 { | |
1081 int area; | |
1082 | |
1083 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1084 { | |
1085 /* Number of glyphs to swap. */ | |
1086 int max_used = max (a->used[area], b->used[area]); | |
1087 | |
1088 /* Start of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1089 struct glyph *glyph_a = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1090 | |
1091 /* End + 1 of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1092 struct glyph *glyph_a_end = a->glyphs[max_used]; | |
1093 | |
1094 /* Start of glyphs in area of row B. */ | |
1095 struct glyph *glyph_b = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1096 | |
1097 while (glyph_a < glyph_a_end) | |
1098 { | |
1099 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
1100 initialization. */ | |
1101 struct glyph temp; | |
1102 temp = *glyph_a; | |
1103 *glyph_a = *glyph_b; | |
1104 *glyph_b = temp; | |
1105 ++glyph_a; | |
1106 ++glyph_b; | |
314 | 1107 } |
1108 } | |
1109 } | |
25012 | 1110 |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1111 #endif /* 0 */ |
25012 | 1112 |
1113 /* Exchange pointers to glyph memory between glyph rows A and B. */ | |
1114 | |
1115 static INLINE void | |
1116 swap_glyph_pointers (a, b) | |
1117 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1118 { | |
1119 int i; | |
1120 for (i = 0; i < LAST_AREA + 1; ++i) | |
1121 { | |
1122 struct glyph *temp = a->glyphs[i]; | |
1123 a->glyphs[i] = b->glyphs[i]; | |
1124 b->glyphs[i] = temp; | |
1125 } | |
1126 } | |
1127 | |
1128 | |
1129 /* Copy glyph row structure FROM to glyph row structure TO, except | |
1130 that glyph pointers in the structures are left unchanged. */ | |
1131 | |
1132 INLINE void | |
1133 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from) | |
1134 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1135 { | |
1136 struct glyph *pointers[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
1137 | |
1138 /* Save glyph pointers of TO. */ | |
1139 bcopy (to->glyphs, pointers, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1140 | |
1141 /* Do a structure assignment. */ | |
1142 *to = *from; | |
1143 | |
1144 /* Restore original pointers of TO. */ | |
1145 bcopy (pointers, to->glyphs, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1146 } | |
1147 | |
1148 | |
1149 /* Copy contents of glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. Glyph pointers in | |
1150 TO and FROM are left unchanged. Glyph contents are copied from the | |
1151 glyph memory of FROM to the glyph memory of TO. Increment buffer | |
1152 positions in row TO by DELTA/ DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
1153 | |
1154 void | |
1155 copy_glyph_row_contents (to, from, delta, delta_bytes) | |
1156 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1157 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1158 { | |
1159 int area; | |
1160 | |
1161 /* This is like a structure assignment TO = FROM, except that | |
1162 glyph pointers in the rows are left unchanged. */ | |
1163 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1164 | |
1165 /* Copy glyphs from FROM to TO. */ | |
1166 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1167 if (from->used[area]) | |
1168 bcopy (from->glyphs[area], to->glyphs[area], | |
1169 from->used[area] * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
1170 | |
1171 /* Increment buffer positions in TO by DELTA. */ | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
1172 increment_row_positions (to, delta, delta_bytes); |
25012 | 1173 } |
1174 | |
1175 | |
1176 /* Assign glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. This works like a structure | |
1177 assignment TO = FROM, except that glyph pointers are not copied but | |
1178 exchanged between TO and FROM. Pointers must be exchanged to avoid | |
1179 a memory leak. */ | |
1180 | |
1181 static INLINE void | |
1182 assign_row (to, from) | |
1183 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1184 { | |
1185 swap_glyph_pointers (to, from); | |
1186 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1187 } | |
1188 | |
1189 | |
1190 /* Test whether the glyph memory of the glyph row WINDOW_ROW, which is | |
1191 a row in a window matrix, is a slice of the glyph memory of the | |
1192 glyph row FRAME_ROW which is a row in a frame glyph matrix. Value | |
1193 is non-zero if the glyph memory of WINDOW_ROW is part of the glyph | |
1194 memory of FRAME_ROW. */ | |
1195 | |
30323
4cd1b8fe118c
(direct_output_for_insert): Remove confusing
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30307
diff
changeset
|
1196 #ifdef GLYPH_DEBUG |
4cd1b8fe118c
(direct_output_for_insert): Remove confusing
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30307
diff
changeset
|
1197 |
25012 | 1198 static int |
1199 glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row) | |
1200 struct glyph_row *window_row, *frame_row; | |
1201 { | |
1202 struct glyph *window_glyph_start = window_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1203 struct glyph *frame_glyph_start = frame_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1204 struct glyph *frame_glyph_end = frame_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
1205 | |
1206 return (frame_glyph_start <= window_glyph_start | |
1207 && window_glyph_start < frame_glyph_end); | |
1208 } | |
1209 | |
30323
4cd1b8fe118c
(direct_output_for_insert): Remove confusing
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30307
diff
changeset
|
1210 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG */ |
25012 | 1211 |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1212 #if 0 |
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1213 |
25012 | 1214 /* Find the row in the window glyph matrix WINDOW_MATRIX being a slice |
1215 of ROW in the frame matrix FRAME_MATRIX. Value is null if no row | |
1216 in WINDOW_MATRIX is found satisfying the condition. */ | |
1217 | |
1218 static struct glyph_row * | |
1219 find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, row) | |
1220 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
1221 int row; | |
1222 { | |
1223 int i; | |
1224 | |
1225 xassert (row >= 0 && row < frame_matrix->nrows); | |
1226 | |
1227 for (i = 0; i < window_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1228 if (glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
1229 frame_matrix->rows + row)) | |
1230 break; | |
1231 | |
1232 return i < window_matrix->nrows ? window_matrix->rows + i : 0; | |
1233 } | |
1234 | |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1235 #endif /* 0 */ |
25012 | 1236 |
1237 /* Prepare ROW for display. Desired rows are cleared lazily, | |
1238 i.e. they are only marked as to be cleared by setting their | |
1239 enabled_p flag to zero. When a row is to be displayed, a prior | |
1240 call to this function really clears it. */ | |
1241 | |
1242 void | |
1243 prepare_desired_row (row) | |
1244 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1245 { | |
1246 if (!row->enabled_p) | |
1247 { | |
1248 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1249 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1250 } | |
1251 } | |
1252 | |
1253 | |
1254 /* Return a hash code for glyph row ROW. */ | |
1255 | |
1256 int | |
1257 line_hash_code (row) | |
1258 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1259 { | |
1260 int hash = 0; | |
1261 | |
1262 if (row->enabled_p) | |
1263 { | |
1264 if (row->inverse_p) | |
1265 { | |
1266 /* Give all highlighted lines the same hash code | |
1267 so as to encourage scrolling to leave them in place. */ | |
1268 hash = -1; | |
1269 } | |
1270 else | |
1271 { | |
1272 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1273 struct glyph *end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1274 | |
1275 while (glyph < end) | |
1276 { | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1277 int c = glyph->u.ch; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1278 int face_id = glyph->face_id; |
25012 | 1279 if (must_write_spaces) |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1280 c -= SPACEGLYPH; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1281 hash = (((hash << 4) + (hash >> 24)) & 0x0fffffff) + c; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1282 hash = (((hash << 4) + (hash >> 24)) & 0x0fffffff) + face_id; |
25012 | 1283 ++glyph; |
1284 } | |
1285 | |
1286 if (hash == 0) | |
1287 hash = 1; | |
1288 } | |
1289 } | |
1290 | |
1291 return hash; | |
1292 } | |
1293 | |
1294 | |
1295 /* Return the cost of drawing line VPOS In MATRIX. The cost equals | |
1296 the number of characters in the line. If must_write_spaces is | |
1297 zero, leading and trailing spaces are ignored. */ | |
1298 | |
1299 static unsigned int | |
1300 line_draw_cost (matrix, vpos) | |
1301 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1302 int vpos; | |
1303 { | |
1304 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows + vpos; | |
1305 struct glyph *beg = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1306 struct glyph *end = beg + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1307 int len; | |
1308 Lisp_Object *glyph_table_base = GLYPH_TABLE_BASE; | |
1309 int glyph_table_len = GLYPH_TABLE_LENGTH; | |
1310 | |
1311 /* Ignore trailing and leading spaces if we can. */ | |
1312 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
1313 { | |
1314 /* Skip from the end over trailing spaces. */ | |
1315 while (end != beg && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*end)) | |
1316 --end; | |
1317 | |
1318 /* All blank line. */ | |
1319 if (end == beg) | |
1320 return 0; | |
1321 | |
1322 /* Skip over leading spaces. */ | |
1323 while (CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*beg)) | |
1324 ++beg; | |
1325 } | |
1326 | |
1327 /* If we don't have a glyph-table, each glyph is one character, | |
1328 so return the number of glyphs. */ | |
1329 if (glyph_table_base == 0) | |
1330 len = end - beg; | |
1331 else | |
1332 { | |
1333 /* Otherwise, scan the glyphs and accumulate their total length | |
1334 in LEN. */ | |
1335 len = 0; | |
1336 while (beg < end) | |
1337 { | |
1338 GLYPH g = GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*beg); | |
1339 | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1340 if (g < 0 |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1341 || GLYPH_SIMPLE_P (glyph_table_base, glyph_table_len, g)) |
25012 | 1342 len += 1; |
1343 else | |
1344 len += GLYPH_LENGTH (glyph_table_base, g); | |
1345 | |
1346 ++beg; | |
1347 } | |
1348 } | |
1349 | |
1350 return len; | |
1351 } | |
1352 | |
1353 | |
1354 /* Test two glyph rows A and B for equality. Value is non-zero if A | |
1355 and B have equal contents. W is the window to which the glyphs | |
1356 rows A and B belong. It is needed here to test for partial row | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1357 visibility. MOUSE_FACE_P non-zero means compare the mouse_face_p |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1358 flags of A and B, too. */ |
25012 | 1359 |
1360 static INLINE int | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1361 row_equal_p (w, a, b, mouse_face_p) |
25012 | 1362 struct window *w; |
1363 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1364 int mouse_face_p; |
25012 | 1365 { |
1366 if (a == b) | |
1367 return 1; | |
1368 else if (a->hash != b->hash) | |
1369 return 0; | |
1370 else | |
1371 { | |
1372 struct glyph *a_glyph, *b_glyph, *a_end; | |
1373 int area; | |
1374 | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1375 if (mouse_face_p && a->mouse_face_p != b->mouse_face_p) |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1376 return 0; |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1377 |
25012 | 1378 /* Compare glyphs. */ |
1379 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1380 { | |
1381 if (a->used[area] != b->used[area]) | |
1382 return 0; | |
1383 | |
1384 a_glyph = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1385 a_end = a_glyph + a->used[area]; | |
1386 b_glyph = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1387 | |
1388 while (a_glyph < a_end | |
1389 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (a_glyph, b_glyph)) | |
1390 ++a_glyph, ++b_glyph; | |
1391 | |
1392 if (a_glyph != a_end) | |
1393 return 0; | |
1394 } | |
1395 | |
1396 if (a->truncated_on_left_p != b->truncated_on_left_p | |
1397 || a->inverse_p != b->inverse_p | |
1398 || a->fill_line_p != b->fill_line_p | |
1399 || a->truncated_on_right_p != b->truncated_on_right_p | |
1400 || a->overlay_arrow_p != b->overlay_arrow_p | |
1401 || a->continued_p != b->continued_p | |
1402 || a->indicate_empty_line_p != b->indicate_empty_line_p | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1403 || a->overlapped_p != b->overlapped_p |
25012 | 1404 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (a) |
1405 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (b)) | |
1406 /* Different partially visible characters on left margin. */ | |
1407 || a->x != b->x | |
1408 /* Different height. */ | |
1409 || a->ascent != b->ascent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1410 || a->phys_ascent != b->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1411 || a->phys_height != b->phys_height |
25012 | 1412 || a->visible_height != b->visible_height) |
1413 return 0; | |
1414 } | |
1415 | |
1416 return 1; | |
1417 } | |
1418 | |
1419 | |
314 | 1420 |
25012 | 1421 /*********************************************************************** |
1422 Glyph Pool | |
1423 | |
1424 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph pools. | |
1425 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1426 | |
1427 /* Allocate a glyph_pool structure. The structure returned is | |
1428 initialized with zeros. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1429 incremented for each pool allocated. */ | |
1430 | |
1431 static struct glyph_pool * | |
1432 new_glyph_pool () | |
1433 { | |
1434 struct glyph_pool *result; | |
1435 | |
1436 /* Allocate a new glyph_pool and clear it. */ | |
1437 result = (struct glyph_pool *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
1438 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
1439 | |
1440 /* For memory leak and double deletion checking. */ | |
1441 ++glyph_pool_count; | |
1442 | |
1443 return result; | |
1444 } | |
1445 | |
1446 | |
1447 /* Free a glyph_pool structure POOL. The function may be called with | |
1448 a null POOL pointer. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1449 decremented with every pool structure freed. If this count gets | |
1450 negative, more structures were freed than allocated, i.e. one | |
1451 structure must have been freed more than once or a bogus pointer | |
1452 was passed to free_glyph_pool. */ | |
1453 | |
1454 static void | |
1455 free_glyph_pool (pool) | |
1456 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1457 { | |
1458 if (pool) | |
1459 { | |
1460 /* More freed than allocated? */ | |
1461 --glyph_pool_count; | |
1462 xassert (glyph_pool_count >= 0); | |
1463 | |
1464 xfree (pool->glyphs); | |
1465 xfree (pool); | |
1466 } | |
1467 } | |
1468 | |
1469 | |
1470 /* Enlarge a glyph pool POOL. MATRIX_DIM gives the number of rows and | |
1471 columns we need. This function never shrinks a pool. The only | |
1472 case in which this would make sense, would be when a frame's size | |
1473 is changed from a large value to a smaller one. But, if someone | |
1474 does it once, we can expect that he will do it again. | |
1475 | |
1476 Value is non-zero if the pool changed in a way which makes | |
1477 re-adjusting window glyph matrices necessary. */ | |
1478 | |
1479 static int | |
1480 realloc_glyph_pool (pool, matrix_dim) | |
1481 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1482 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
1483 { | |
1484 int needed; | |
1485 int changed_p; | |
1486 | |
1487 changed_p = (pool->glyphs == 0 | |
1488 || matrix_dim.height != pool->nrows | |
1489 || matrix_dim.width != pool->ncolumns); | |
1490 | |
1491 /* Enlarge the glyph pool. */ | |
1492 needed = matrix_dim.width * matrix_dim.height; | |
1493 if (needed > pool->nglyphs) | |
1494 { | |
1495 int size = needed * sizeof (struct glyph); | |
1496 | |
1497 if (pool->glyphs) | |
1498 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1499 else | |
1500 { | |
1501 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xmalloc (size); | |
1502 bzero (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1503 } | |
1504 | |
1505 pool->nglyphs = needed; | |
1506 } | |
1507 | |
1508 /* Remember the number of rows and columns because (a) we use then | |
1509 to do sanity checks, and (b) the number of columns determines | |
1510 where rows in the frame matrix start---this must be available to | |
1511 determine pointers to rows of window sub-matrices. */ | |
1512 pool->nrows = matrix_dim.height; | |
1513 pool->ncolumns = matrix_dim.width; | |
1514 | |
1515 return changed_p; | |
1516 } | |
1517 | |
1518 | |
1519 | |
1520 /*********************************************************************** | |
1521 Debug Code | |
1522 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1523 | |
1524 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
1525 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1526 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1527 /* Flush standard output. This is sometimes useful to call from |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1528 the debugger. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1529 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1530 void |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1531 flush_stdout () |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1532 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1533 fflush (stdout); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1534 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1535 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1536 |
25012 | 1537 /* Check that no glyph pointers have been lost in MATRIX. If a |
1538 pointer has been lost, e.g. by using a structure assignment between | |
1539 rows, at least one pointer must occur more than once in the rows of | |
1540 MATRIX. */ | |
1541 | |
1542 void | |
1543 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix) | |
1544 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1545 { | |
1546 int i, j; | |
1547 | |
1548 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1549 for (j = 0; j < matrix->nrows; ++j) | |
1550 xassert (i == j | |
1551 || (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
1552 != matrix->rows[j].glyphs[TEXT_AREA])); | |
1553 } | |
1554 | |
1555 | |
1556 /* Get a pointer to glyph row ROW in MATRIX, with bounds checks. */ | |
1557 | |
1558 struct glyph_row * | |
1559 matrix_row (matrix, row) | |
1560 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1561 int row; | |
1562 { | |
1563 xassert (matrix && matrix->rows); | |
1564 xassert (row >= 0 && row < matrix->nrows); | |
1565 | |
1566 /* That's really too slow for normal testing because this function | |
1567 is called almost everywhere. Although---it's still astonishingly | |
1568 fast, so it is valuable to have for debugging purposes. */ | |
314 | 1569 #if 0 |
25012 | 1570 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix); |
1571 #endif | |
1572 | |
1573 return matrix->rows + row; | |
1574 } | |
1575 | |
1576 | |
1577 #if 0 /* This function makes invalid assumptions when text is | |
1578 partially invisible. But it might come handy for debugging | |
1579 nevertheless. */ | |
1580 | |
1581 /* Check invariants that must hold for an up to date current matrix of | |
1582 window W. */ | |
1583 | |
1584 static void | |
1585 check_matrix_invariants (w) | |
314 | 1586 struct window *w; |
1587 { | |
25012 | 1588 struct glyph_matrix *matrix = w->current_matrix; |
1589 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
1590 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
1591 struct glyph_row *last_text_row = NULL; | |
1592 struct buffer *saved = current_buffer; | |
1593 struct buffer *buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
1594 int c; | |
1595 | |
1596 /* This can sometimes happen for a fresh window. */ | |
1597 if (matrix->nrows < 2) | |
1598 return; | |
1599 | |
1600 set_buffer_temp (buffer); | |
1601 | |
1602 /* Note: last row is always reserved for the mode line. */ | |
1603 while (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row) | |
1604 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) < yb) | |
1605 { | |
1606 struct glyph_row *next = row + 1; | |
1607 | |
1608 if (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1609 last_text_row = row; | |
1610 | |
1611 /* Check that character and byte positions are in sync. */ | |
1612 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1613 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1614 | |
1615 /* CHAR_TO_BYTE aborts when invoked for a position > Z. We can | |
1616 have such a position temporarily in case of a minibuffer | |
1617 displaying something like `[Sole completion]' at its end. */ | |
1618 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) < BUF_ZV (current_buffer)) | |
1619 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1620 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1621 | |
1622 /* Check that end position of `row' is equal to start position | |
1623 of next row. */ | |
1624 if (next->enabled_p && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (next)) | |
1625 { | |
1626 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) | |
1627 == MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (next)); | |
1628 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1629 == MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (next)); | |
1630 } | |
1631 row = next; | |
1632 } | |
1633 | |
1634 xassert (w->current_matrix->nrows == w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
1635 xassert (w->desired_matrix->rows != NULL); | |
1636 set_buffer_temp (saved); | |
1637 } | |
1638 | |
1639 #endif /* 0 */ | |
1640 | |
1641 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
1642 | |
1643 | |
1644 | |
1645 /********************************************************************** | |
1646 Allocating/ Adjusting Glyph Matrices | |
1647 **********************************************************************/ | |
1648 | |
1649 /* Allocate glyph matrices over a window tree for a frame-based | |
1650 redisplay | |
1651 | |
1652 X and Y are column/row within the frame glyph matrix where | |
1653 sub-matrices for the window tree rooted at WINDOW must be | |
1654 allocated. CH_DIM contains the dimensions of the smallest | |
1655 character that could be used during display. DIM_ONLY_P non-zero | |
1656 means that the caller of this function is only interested in the | |
1657 result matrix dimension, and matrix adjustments should not be | |
1658 performed. | |
1659 | |
1660 The function returns the total width/height of the sub-matrices of | |
1661 the window tree. If called on a frame root window, the computation | |
1662 will take the mini-buffer window into account. | |
1663 | |
1664 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS is set to a bit mask with bits | |
1665 | |
1666 NEW_LEAF_MATRIX set if any window in the tree did not have a | |
1667 glyph matrices yet, and | |
1668 | |
1669 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX set if the dimension or location of a matrix of | |
1670 any window in the tree will be changed or have been changed (see | |
1671 DIM_ONLY_P). | |
1672 | |
1673 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS must be initialized by the caller of this | |
1674 function. | |
1675 | |
1676 Windows are arranged into chains of windows on the same level | |
1677 through the next fields of window structures. Such a level can be | |
1678 either a sequence of horizontally adjacent windows from left to | |
1679 right, or a sequence of vertically adjacent windows from top to | |
1680 bottom. Each window in a horizontal sequence can be either a leaf | |
1681 window or a vertical sequence; a window in a vertical sequence can | |
1682 be either a leaf or a horizontal sequence. All windows in a | |
1683 horizontal sequence have the same height, and all windows in a | |
1684 vertical sequence have the same width. | |
1685 | |
1686 This function uses, for historical reasons, a more general | |
1687 algorithm to determine glyph matrix dimensions that would be | |
1688 necessary. | |
1689 | |
1690 The matrix height of a horizontal sequence is determined by the | |
1691 maximum height of any matrix in the sequence. The matrix width of | |
1692 a horizontal sequence is computed by adding up matrix widths of | |
1693 windows in the sequence. | |
1694 | |
1695 |<------- result width ------->| | |
1696 +---------+----------+---------+ --- | |
1697 | | | | | | |
1698 | | | | | |
1699 +---------+ | | result height | |
1700 | +---------+ | |
1701 | | | | |
1702 +----------+ --- | |
1703 | |
1704 The matrix width of a vertical sequence is the maximum matrix width | |
1705 of any window in the sequence. Its height is computed by adding up | |
1706 matrix heights of windows in the sequence. | |
1707 | |
1708 |<---- result width -->| | |
1709 +---------+ --- | |
1710 | | | | |
1711 | | | | |
1712 +---------+--+ | | |
1713 | | | | |
1714 | | result height | |
1715 | | | |
1716 +------------+---------+ | | |
1717 | | | | |
1718 | | | | |
1719 +------------+---------+ --- */ | |
1720 | |
1721 /* Bit indicating that a new matrix will be allocated or has been | |
1722 allocated. */ | |
1723 | |
1724 #define NEW_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 0) | |
1725 | |
1726 /* Bit indicating that a matrix will or has changed its location or | |
1727 size. */ | |
1728 | |
1729 #define CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 1) | |
1730 | |
1731 static struct dim | |
1732 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (window, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1733 dim_only_p, window_change_flags) | |
1734 Lisp_Object window; | |
1735 int x, y; | |
1736 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1737 int dim_only_p; | |
1738 int *window_change_flags; | |
1739 { | |
1740 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (XWINDOW (window))); | |
1741 int x0 = x, y0 = y; | |
1742 int wmax = 0, hmax = 0; | |
1743 struct dim total; | |
1744 struct dim dim; | |
1745 struct window *w; | |
1746 int in_horz_combination_p; | |
1747 | |
1748 /* What combination is WINDOW part of? Compute this once since the | |
1749 result is the same for all windows in the `next' chain. The | |
1750 special case of a root window (parent equal to nil) is treated | |
1751 like a vertical combination because a root window's `next' | |
1752 points to the mini-buffer window, if any, which is arranged | |
1753 vertically below other windows. */ | |
1754 in_horz_combination_p | |
1755 = (!NILP (XWINDOW (window)->parent) | |
1756 && !NILP (XWINDOW (XWINDOW (window)->parent)->hchild)); | |
1757 | |
1758 /* For WINDOW and all windows on the same level. */ | |
1759 do | |
1760 { | |
1761 w = XWINDOW (window); | |
1762 | |
1763 /* Get the dimension of the window sub-matrix for W, depending | |
1764 on whether this a combination or a leaf window. */ | |
1765 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1766 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->hchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1767 dim_only_p, | |
1768 window_change_flags); | |
1769 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
1770 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->vchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1771 dim_only_p, | |
1772 window_change_flags); | |
1773 else | |
1774 { | |
1775 /* If not already done, allocate sub-matrix structures. */ | |
1776 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
1777 { | |
1778 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
1779 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
1780 *window_change_flags |= NEW_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1781 } | |
1782 | |
1783 /* Width and height MUST be chosen so that there are no | |
1784 holes in the frame matrix. */ | |
28507
b6f06a755c7d
make_number/XINT/XUINT conversions; EQ/== fixes; ==Qnil -> NILP
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
28361
diff
changeset
|
1785 dim.width = XINT (w->width); |
b6f06a755c7d
make_number/XINT/XUINT conversions; EQ/== fixes; ==Qnil -> NILP
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
28361
diff
changeset
|
1786 dim.height = XINT (w->height); |
25012 | 1787 |
1788 /* Will matrix be re-allocated? */ | |
1789 if (x != w->desired_matrix->matrix_x | |
1790 || y != w->desired_matrix->matrix_y | |
1791 || dim.width != w->desired_matrix->matrix_w | |
1792 || dim.height != w->desired_matrix->matrix_h | |
1793 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1794 w->right_margin_width) | |
1795 != w->desired_matrix->left_margin_glyphs) | |
1796 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1797 w->left_margin_width) | |
1798 != w->desired_matrix->right_margin_glyphs)) | |
1799 *window_change_flags |= CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1800 | |
1801 /* Actually change matrices, if allowed. Do not consider | |
1802 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX computed above here because the pool | |
1803 may have been changed which we don't now here. We trust | |
1804 that we only will be called with DIM_ONLY_P != 0 when | |
1805 necessary. */ | |
1806 if (!dim_only_p) | |
1807 { | |
1808 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1809 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1810 } | |
1811 } | |
1812 | |
1813 /* If we are part of a horizontal combination, advance x for | |
1814 windows to the right of W; otherwise advance y for windows | |
1815 below W. */ | |
1816 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1817 x += dim.width; | |
1818 else | |
1819 y += dim.height; | |
1820 | |
1821 /* Remember maximum glyph matrix dimensions. */ | |
1822 wmax = max (wmax, dim.width); | |
1823 hmax = max (hmax, dim.height); | |
1824 | |
1825 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
1826 window = w->next; | |
1827 } | |
1828 while (!NILP (window)); | |
1829 | |
1830 /* Set `total' to the total glyph matrix dimension of this window | |
1831 level. In a vertical combination, the width is the width of the | |
1832 widest window; the height is the y we finally reached, corrected | |
1833 by the y we started with. In a horizontal combination, the total | |
1834 height is the height of the tallest window, and the width is the | |
1835 x we finally reached, corrected by the x we started with. */ | |
1836 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1837 { | |
1838 total.width = x - x0; | |
1839 total.height = hmax; | |
1840 } | |
1841 else | |
1842 { | |
1843 total.width = wmax; | |
1844 total.height = y - y0; | |
1845 } | |
1846 | |
1847 return total; | |
1848 } | |
1849 | |
1850 | |
1851 /* Allocate window matrices for window-based redisplay. W is the | |
1852 window whose matrices must be allocated/reallocated. CH_DIM is the | |
1853 size of the smallest character that could potentially be used on W. */ | |
1854 | |
1855 static void | |
1856 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim) | |
1857 struct window *w; | |
1858 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1859 { | |
1860 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
1861 | |
1862 while (w) | |
314 | 1863 { |
25012 | 1864 if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
1865 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->vchild), ch_dim); | |
1866 else if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1867 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->hchild), ch_dim); | |
1868 else | |
314 | 1869 { |
25012 | 1870 /* W is a leaf window. */ |
1871 int window_pixel_width = XFLOATINT (w->width) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
1872 int window_pixel_height = window_box_height (w) + abs (w->vscroll); | |
1873 struct dim dim; | |
1874 | |
1875 /* If matrices are not yet allocated, allocate them now. */ | |
1876 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
314 | 1877 { |
25012 | 1878 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); |
1879 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); | |
314 | 1880 } |
25012 | 1881 |
1882 /* Compute number of glyphs needed in a glyph row. */ | |
1883 dim.width = (((window_pixel_width + ch_dim.width - 1) | |
1884 / ch_dim.width) | |
1885 /* 2 partially visible columns in the text area. */ | |
1886 + 2 | |
1887 /* One partially visible column at the right | |
1888 edge of each marginal area. */ | |
1889 + 1 + 1); | |
1890 | |
1891 /* Compute number of glyph rows needed. */ | |
1892 dim.height = (((window_pixel_height + ch_dim.height - 1) | |
1893 / ch_dim.height) | |
1894 /* One partially visible line at the top and | |
1895 bottom of the window. */ | |
1896 + 2 | |
1897 /* 2 for top and mode line. */ | |
1898 + 2); | |
1899 | |
1900 /* Change matrices. */ | |
1901 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1902 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1903 } | |
1904 | |
1905 w = NILP (w->next) ? NULL : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
1906 } | |
1907 } | |
1908 | |
1909 | |
1910 /* Re-allocate/ re-compute glyph matrices on frame F. If F is null, | |
1911 do it for all frames; otherwise do it just for the given frame. | |
1912 This function must be called when a new frame is created, its size | |
1913 changes, or its window configuration changes. */ | |
1914 | |
1915 void | |
1916 adjust_glyphs (f) | |
1917 struct frame *f; | |
1918 { | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1919 /* Block input so that expose events and other events that access |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1920 glyph matrices are not processed while we are changing them. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1921 BLOCK_INPUT; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1922 |
25012 | 1923 if (f) |
1924 adjust_frame_glyphs (f); | |
1925 else | |
1926 { | |
1927 Lisp_Object tail, lisp_frame; | |
1928 | |
1929 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, lisp_frame) | |
1930 adjust_frame_glyphs (XFRAME (lisp_frame)); | |
1931 } | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1932 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1933 UNBLOCK_INPUT; |
25012 | 1934 } |
1935 | |
1936 | |
1937 /* Adjust frame glyphs when Emacs is initialized. | |
1938 | |
1939 To be called from init_display. | |
1940 | |
1941 We need a glyph matrix because redraw will happen soon. | |
1942 Unfortunately, window sizes on selected_frame are not yet set to | |
1943 meaningful values. I believe we can assume that there are only two | |
1944 windows on the frame---the mini-buffer and the root window. Frame | |
1945 height and width seem to be correct so far. So, set the sizes of | |
1946 windows to estimated values. */ | |
1947 | |
1948 static void | |
1949 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially () | |
1950 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1951 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1952 struct window *root = XWINDOW (sf->root_window); |
25012 | 1953 struct window *mini = XWINDOW (root->next); |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1954 int frame_height = FRAME_HEIGHT (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1955 int frame_width = FRAME_WIDTH (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1956 int top_margin = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (sf); |
25012 | 1957 |
1958 /* Do it for the root window. */ | |
1959 XSETFASTINT (root->top, top_margin); | |
1960 XSETFASTINT (root->width, frame_width); | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1961 set_window_height (sf->root_window, frame_height - 1 - top_margin, 0); |
25012 | 1962 |
1963 /* Do it for the mini-buffer window. */ | |
1964 XSETFASTINT (mini->top, frame_height - 1); | |
1965 XSETFASTINT (mini->width, frame_width); | |
1966 set_window_height (root->next, 1, 0); | |
1967 | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1968 adjust_frame_glyphs (sf); |
25012 | 1969 glyphs_initialized_initially_p = 1; |
1970 } | |
1971 | |
1972 | |
1973 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F. */ | |
1974 | |
1975 static void | |
1976 adjust_frame_glyphs (f) | |
1977 struct frame *f; | |
1978 { | |
1979 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
1980 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f); | |
1981 else | |
1982 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f); | |
1983 | |
1984 /* Don't forget the message buffer and the buffer for | |
1985 decode_mode_spec. */ | |
1986 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f); | |
1987 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f); | |
1988 | |
1989 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 1; | |
1990 } | |
1991 | |
1992 | |
1993 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
1994 frame-based redisplay. */ | |
1995 | |
1996 static void | |
1997 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f) | |
1998 struct frame *f; | |
1999 { | |
2000 struct dim ch_dim; | |
2001 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
2002 int pool_changed_p; | |
2003 int window_change_flags; | |
2004 int top_window_y; | |
2005 | |
2006 if (!FRAME_LIVE_P (f)) | |
2007 return; | |
2008 | |
2009 /* Determine the smallest character in any font for F. On | |
2010 console windows, all characters have dimension (1, 1). */ | |
2011 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
2012 | |
2013 top_window_y = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); | |
2014 | |
2015 /* Allocate glyph pool structures if not already done. */ | |
2016 if (f->desired_pool == NULL) | |
2017 { | |
2018 f->desired_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
2019 f->current_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
2020 } | |
2021 | |
2022 /* Allocate frames matrix structures if needed. */ | |
2023 if (f->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
2024 { | |
2025 f->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
2026 f->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
2027 } | |
2028 | |
2029 /* Compute window glyph matrices. (This takes the mini-buffer | |
2030 window into account). The result is the size of the frame glyph | |
2031 matrix needed. The variable window_change_flags is set to a bit | |
2032 mask indicating whether new matrices will be allocated or | |
2033 existing matrices change their size or location within the frame | |
2034 matrix. */ | |
2035 window_change_flags = 0; | |
2036 matrix_dim | |
2037 = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
2038 0, top_window_y, | |
2039 ch_dim, 1, | |
2040 &window_change_flags); | |
2041 | |
2042 /* Add in menu bar lines, if any. */ | |
2043 matrix_dim.height += top_window_y; | |
2044 | |
2045 /* Enlarge pools as necessary. */ | |
2046 pool_changed_p = realloc_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool, matrix_dim); | |
2047 realloc_glyph_pool (f->current_pool, matrix_dim); | |
2048 | |
2049 /* Set up glyph pointers within window matrices. Do this only if | |
2050 absolutely necessary since it requires a frame redraw. */ | |
2051 if (pool_changed_p || window_change_flags) | |
2052 { | |
2053 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
2054 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
2055 0, top_window_y, ch_dim, 0, | |
2056 &window_change_flags); | |
2057 | |
2058 /* Size of frame matrices must equal size of frame. Note | |
2059 that we are called for X frames with window widths NOT equal | |
2060 to the frame width (from CHANGE_FRAME_SIZE_1). */ | |
2061 xassert (matrix_dim.width == FRAME_WIDTH (f) | |
2062 && matrix_dim.height == FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
2063 | |
2064 /* Resize frame matrices. */ | |
2065 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->desired_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2066 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->current_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2067 | |
2068 /* Since location and size of sub-matrices within the pool may | |
2069 have changed, and current matrices don't have meaningful | |
2070 contents anymore, mark the frame garbaged. */ | |
2071 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
2072 } | |
2073 } | |
2074 | |
2075 | |
2076 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
2077 window-based redisplay. */ | |
2078 | |
2079 static void | |
2080 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f) | |
2081 struct frame *f; | |
2082 { | |
2083 struct dim ch_dim; | |
2084 struct window *w; | |
2085 | |
2086 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f) && FRAME_LIVE_P (f)); | |
2087 | |
2088 /* Get minimum sizes. */ | |
2089 #ifdef HAVE_WINDOW_SYSTEM | |
2090 ch_dim.width = FRAME_SMALLEST_CHAR_WIDTH (f); | |
2091 ch_dim.height = FRAME_SMALLEST_FONT_HEIGHT (f); | |
2092 #else | |
2093 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
2094 #endif | |
2095 | |
2096 /* Allocate/reallocate window matrices. */ | |
2097 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), | |
2098 ch_dim); | |
2099 | |
2100 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the dummy window used to display | |
2101 the menu bar under X when no X toolkit support is available. */ | |
2102 #ifndef USE_X_TOOLKIT | |
2103 { | |
2104 /* Allocate a dummy window if not already done. */ | |
2105 if (NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2106 { | |
2107 f->menu_bar_window = make_window (); | |
2108 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2109 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); | |
2110 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2111 } | |
2112 else | |
2113 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2114 | |
2115 /* Set window dimensions to frame dimensions and allocate or | |
2116 adjust glyph matrices of W. */ | |
2117 XSETFASTINT (w->top, 0); | |
2118 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
2119 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2120 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); | |
2121 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2122 } | |
2123 #endif /* not USE_X_TOOLKIT */ | |
2124 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2125 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the tool bar window. If we |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2126 don't have a tool bar window yet, make one. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2127 if (NILP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 2128 { |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2129 f->tool_bar_window = make_window (); |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2130 w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2131 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); |
2132 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2133 } | |
2134 else | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2135 w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2136 |
2137 XSETFASTINT (w->top, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2138 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2139 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_TOOL_BAR_LINES (f)); |
25012 | 2140 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); |
2141 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2142 } | |
2143 | |
2144 | |
2145 /* Adjust/ allocate message buffer of frame F. | |
2146 | |
2147 Note that the message buffer is never freed. Since I could not | |
2148 find a free in 19.34, I assume that freeing it would be | |
2149 problematic in some way and don't do it either. | |
2150 | |
2151 (Implementation note: It should be checked if we can free it | |
2152 eventually without causing trouble). */ | |
2153 | |
2154 static void | |
2155 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f) | |
2156 struct frame *f; | |
2157 { | |
2158 int size = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1; | |
2159 | |
2160 if (FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f)) | |
2161 { | |
2162 char *buffer = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f); | |
2163 char *new_buffer = (char *) xrealloc (buffer, size); | |
2164 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = new_buffer; | |
2165 } | |
2166 else | |
2167 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = (char *) xmalloc (size); | |
2168 } | |
2169 | |
2170 | |
2171 /* Re-allocate buffer for decode_mode_spec on frame F. */ | |
2172 | |
2173 static void | |
2174 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f) | |
2175 struct frame *f; | |
2176 { | |
2177 f->decode_mode_spec_buffer | |
2178 = (char *) xrealloc (f->decode_mode_spec_buffer, | |
2179 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1); | |
2180 } | |
2181 | |
2182 | |
2183 | |
2184 /********************************************************************** | |
2185 Freeing Glyph Matrices | |
2186 **********************************************************************/ | |
2187 | |
2188 /* Free glyph memory for a frame F. F may be null. This function can | |
2189 be called for the same frame more than once. The root window of | |
2190 F may be nil when this function is called. This is the case when | |
2191 the function is called when F is destroyed. */ | |
2192 | |
2193 void | |
2194 free_glyphs (f) | |
2195 struct frame *f; | |
2196 { | |
2197 if (f && f->glyphs_initialized_p) | |
2198 { | |
27968
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2199 /* Block interrupt input so that we don't get surprised by an X |
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2200 event while we're in an inconsistent state. */ |
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2201 BLOCK_INPUT; |
25012 | 2202 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 0; |
2203 | |
2204 /* Release window sub-matrices. */ | |
2205 if (!NILP (f->root_window)) | |
2206 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (f->root_window)); | |
2207 | |
2208 /* Free the dummy window for menu bars without X toolkit and its | |
2209 glyph matrices. */ | |
2210 if (!NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2211 { | |
2212 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2213 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2214 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2215 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2216 f->menu_bar_window = Qnil; | |
2217 } | |
2218 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2219 /* Free the tool bar window and its glyph matrices. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2220 if (!NILP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 2221 { |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2222 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2223 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); |
2224 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2225 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2226 f->tool_bar_window = Qnil; |
25012 | 2227 } |
2228 | |
2229 /* Release frame glyph matrices. Reset fields to zero in | |
2230 case we are called a second time. */ | |
2231 if (f->desired_matrix) | |
2232 { | |
2233 free_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
2234 free_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
2235 f->desired_matrix = f->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2236 } | |
2237 | |
2238 /* Release glyph pools. */ | |
2239 if (f->desired_pool) | |
2240 { | |
2241 free_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool); | |
2242 free_glyph_pool (f->current_pool); | |
2243 f->desired_pool = f->current_pool = NULL; | |
314 | 2244 } |
27968
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2245 |
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2246 UNBLOCK_INPUT; |
314 | 2247 } |
2248 } | |
2249 | |
25012 | 2250 |
2251 /* Free glyph sub-matrices in the window tree rooted at W. This | |
2252 function may be called with a null pointer, and it may be called on | |
2253 the same tree more than once. */ | |
2254 | |
2255 void | |
2256 free_window_matrices (w) | |
2257 struct window *w; | |
2258 { | |
2259 while (w) | |
2260 { | |
2261 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2262 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2263 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2264 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2265 else | |
2266 { | |
2267 /* This is a leaf window. Free its memory and reset fields | |
2268 to zero in case this function is called a second time for | |
2269 W. */ | |
2270 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2271 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2272 w->current_matrix = w->desired_matrix = NULL; | |
2273 } | |
2274 | |
2275 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2276 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2277 } | |
2278 } | |
2279 | |
2280 | |
2281 /* Check glyph memory leaks. This function is called from | |
2282 shut_down_emacs. Note that frames are not destroyed when Emacs | |
2283 exits. We therefore free all glyph memory for all active frames | |
2284 explicitly and check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2285 |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2286 void |
25012 | 2287 check_glyph_memory () |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2288 { |
25012 | 2289 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
2290 | |
2291 /* Free glyph memory for all frames. */ | |
2292 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
2293 free_glyphs (XFRAME (frame)); | |
2294 | |
2295 /* Check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
2296 if (glyph_matrix_count) | |
2297 abort (); | |
2298 if (glyph_pool_count) | |
2299 abort (); | |
2300 } | |
2301 | |
2302 | |
2303 | |
2304 /********************************************************************** | |
2305 Building a Frame Matrix | |
2306 **********************************************************************/ | |
2307 | |
2308 /* Most of the redisplay code works on glyph matrices attached to | |
2309 windows. This is a good solution most of the time, but it is not | |
2310 suitable for terminal code. Terminal output functions cannot rely | |
2311 on being able to set an arbitrary terminal window. Instead they | |
2312 must be provided with a view of the whole frame, i.e. the whole | |
2313 screen. We build such a view by constructing a frame matrix from | |
2314 window matrices in this section. | |
2315 | |
2316 Windows that must be updated have their must_be_update_p flag set. | |
2317 For all such windows, their desired matrix is made part of the | |
2318 desired frame matrix. For other windows, their current matrix is | |
2319 made part of the desired frame matrix. | |
2320 | |
2321 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2322 | desired | desired | | |
2323 | | | | |
2324 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2325 | current | | |
2326 | | | |
2327 +----------------------------------+ | |
2328 | |
2329 Desired window matrices can be made part of the frame matrix in a | |
2330 cheap way: We exploit the fact that the desired frame matrix and | |
2331 desired window matrices share their glyph memory. This is not | |
2332 possible for current window matrices. Their glyphs are copied to | |
2333 the desired frame matrix. The latter is equivalent to | |
2334 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. | |
2335 | |
2336 Used glyphs counters for frame matrix rows are the result of adding | |
2337 up glyph lengths of the window matrices. A line in the frame | |
2338 matrix is enabled, if a corresponding line in a window matrix is | |
2339 enabled. | |
2340 | |
2341 After building the desired frame matrix, it will be passed to | |
2342 terminal code, which will manipulate both the desired and current | |
2343 frame matrix. Changes applied to the frame's current matrix have | |
2344 to be visible in current window matrices afterwards, of course. | |
2345 | |
2346 This problem is solved like this: | |
2347 | |
2348 1. Window and frame matrices share glyphs. Window matrices are | |
2349 constructed in a way that their glyph contents ARE the glyph | |
2350 contents needed in a frame matrix. Thus, any modification of | |
2351 glyphs done in terminal code will be reflected in window matrices | |
2352 automatically. | |
2353 | |
2354 2. Exchanges of rows in a frame matrix done by terminal code are | |
2355 intercepted by hook functions so that corresponding row operations | |
2356 on window matrices can be performed. This is necessary because we | |
2357 use pointers to glyphs in glyph row structures. To satisfy the | |
2358 assumption of point 1 above that glyphs are updated implicitly in | |
2359 window matrices when they are manipulated via the frame matrix, | |
2360 window and frame matrix must of course agree where to find the | |
2361 glyphs for their rows. Possible manipulations that must be | |
2362 mirrored are assignments of rows of the desired frame matrix to the | |
2363 current frame matrix and scrolling the current frame matrix. */ | |
2364 | |
2365 /* Build frame F's desired matrix from window matrices. Only windows | |
2366 which have the flag must_be_updated_p set have to be updated. Menu | |
2367 bar lines of a frame are not covered by window matrices, so make | |
2368 sure not to touch them in this function. */ | |
2369 | |
2370 static void | |
2371 build_frame_matrix (f) | |
2372 struct frame *f; | |
2373 { | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2374 int i; |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2375 |
25012 | 2376 /* F must have a frame matrix when this function is called. */ |
2377 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2378 | |
2379 /* Clear all rows in the frame matrix covered by window matrices. | |
2380 Menu bar lines are not covered by windows. */ | |
2381 for (i = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); i < f->desired_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
2382 clear_glyph_row (MATRIX_ROW (f->desired_matrix, i)); | |
2383 | |
2384 /* Build the matrix by walking the window tree. */ | |
2385 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (f->desired_matrix, | |
2386 XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
2387 } | |
2388 | |
2389 | |
2390 /* Walk a window tree, building a frame matrix MATRIX from window | |
2391 matrices. W is the root of a window tree. */ | |
2392 | |
2393 static void | |
2394 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, w) | |
2395 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2396 struct window *w; | |
2397 { | |
2398 while (w) | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2399 { |
25012 | 2400 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
2401 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2402 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2403 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2404 else | |
2405 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (matrix, w); | |
2406 | |
2407 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2408 } |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2409 } |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2410 |
25012 | 2411 |
2412 /* Add a window's matrix to a frame matrix. FRAME_MATRIX is the | |
2413 desired frame matrix built. W is a leaf window whose desired or | |
2414 current matrix is to be added to FRAME_MATRIX. W's flag | |
2415 must_be_updated_p determines which matrix it contributes to | |
2416 FRAME_MATRIX. If must_be_updated_p is non-zero, W's desired matrix | |
2417 is added to FRAME_MATRIX, otherwise W's current matrix is added. | |
2418 Adding a desired matrix means setting up used counters and such in | |
2419 frame rows, while adding a current window matrix to FRAME_MATRIX | |
2420 means copying glyphs. The latter case corresponds to | |
2421 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. */ | |
2422 | |
2423 static void | |
2424 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (frame_matrix, w) | |
2425 struct glyph_matrix *frame_matrix; | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2426 struct window *w; |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2427 { |
25012 | 2428 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix; |
2429 int window_y, frame_y; | |
2430 /* If non-zero, a glyph to insert at the right border of W. */ | |
2431 GLYPH right_border_glyph = 0; | |
2432 | |
2433 /* Set window_matrix to the matrix we have to add to FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2434 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
2435 { | |
2436 window_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
2437 | |
2438 /* Decide whether we want to add a vertical border glyph. */ | |
2439 if (!WINDOW_RIGHTMOST_P (w)) | |
2440 { | |
2441 struct Lisp_Char_Table *dp = window_display_table (w); | |
2442 right_border_glyph = (dp && INTEGERP (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2443 ? XINT (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2444 : '|'); | |
2445 } | |
2446 } | |
2447 else | |
2448 window_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
2449 | |
2450 /* For all rows in the window matrix and corresponding rows in the | |
2451 frame matrix. */ | |
2452 window_y = 0; | |
2453 frame_y = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2454 while (window_y < window_matrix->nrows) | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2455 { |
25012 | 2456 struct glyph_row *frame_row = frame_matrix->rows + frame_y; |
2457 struct glyph_row *window_row = window_matrix->rows + window_y; | |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2458 int current_row_p = window_matrix == w->current_matrix; |
25012 | 2459 |
2460 /* Fill up the frame row with spaces up to the left margin of the | |
2461 window row. */ | |
2462 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (frame_row, window_matrix->matrix_x); | |
2463 | |
2464 /* Fill up areas in the window matrix row with spaces. */ | |
2465 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (window_row); | |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2466 |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2467 /* If only part of W's desired matrix has been built, and |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2468 window_row wasn't displayed, use the corresponding current |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2469 row instead. */ |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2470 if (window_matrix == w->desired_matrix |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2471 && !window_row->enabled_p) |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2472 { |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2473 window_row = w->current_matrix->rows + window_y; |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2474 current_row_p = 1; |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2475 } |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2476 |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2477 if (current_row_p) |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2478 { |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2479 /* Copy window row to frame row. */ |
25012 | 2480 bcopy (window_row->glyphs[0], |
2481 frame_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + window_matrix->matrix_x, | |
2482 window_matrix->matrix_w * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
2483 } | |
2484 else | |
2485 { | |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2486 xassert (window_row->enabled_p); |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2487 |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2488 /* Only when a desired row has been displayed, we want |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2489 the corresponding frame row to be updated. */ |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2490 frame_row->enabled_p = 1; |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2491 |
25012 | 2492 /* Maybe insert a vertical border between horizontally adjacent |
2493 windows. */ | |
2494 if (right_border_glyph) | |
2495 { | |
2496 struct glyph *border = window_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] - 1; | |
2497 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (*border, right_border_glyph); | |
2498 } | |
2499 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2500 #if 0 /* This shouldn't be necessary. Let's check it. */ |
25012 | 2501 /* Due to hooks installed, it normally doesn't happen that |
2502 window rows and frame rows of the same matrix are out of | |
2503 sync, i.e. have a different understanding of where to | |
2504 find glyphs for the row. The following is a safety-belt | |
2505 that doesn't cost much and makes absolutely sure that | |
2506 window and frame matrices are in sync. */ | |
2507 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2508 { |
25012 | 2509 /* Find the row in the window being a slice. There |
2510 should exist one from program logic. */ | |
2511 struct glyph_row *slice_row | |
2512 = find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, frame_y); | |
2513 xassert (slice_row != 0); | |
2514 | |
2515 /* Exchange glyphs between both window rows. */ | |
2516 swap_glyphs_in_rows (window_row, slice_row); | |
2517 | |
2518 /* Exchange pointers between both rows. */ | |
2519 swap_glyph_pointers (window_row, slice_row); | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2520 } |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2521 #endif |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2522 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2523 /* Window row window_y must be a slice of frame row |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2524 frame_y. */ |
25012 | 2525 xassert (glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)); |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2526 |
25012 | 2527 /* If rows are in sync, we don't have to copy glyphs because |
2528 frame and window share glyphs. */ | |
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2529 |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2530 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2531 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2532 #endif |
25012 | 2533 } |
2534 | |
2535 /* Set number of used glyphs in the frame matrix. Since we fill | |
2536 up with spaces, and visit leaf windows from left to right it | |
2537 can be done simply. */ | |
2538 frame_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
2539 = window_matrix->matrix_x + window_matrix->matrix_w; | |
2540 | |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2541 /* Or in other flags. */ |
25012 | 2542 frame_row->inverse_p |= window_row->inverse_p; |
2543 | |
2544 /* Next row. */ | |
2545 ++window_y; | |
2546 ++frame_y; | |
2547 } | |
2548 } | |
2549 | |
2550 | |
2551 /* Add spaces to a glyph row ROW in a window matrix. | |
2552 | |
2553 Each row has the form: | |
2554 | |
2555 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2556 | left | text | right | | |
2557 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2558 | |
2559 Left and right marginal areas are optional. This function adds | |
2560 spaces to areas so that there are no empty holes between areas. | |
2561 In other words: If the right area is not empty, the text area | |
2562 is filled up with spaces up to the right area. If the text area | |
2563 is not empty, the left area is filled up. | |
2564 | |
2565 To be called for frame-based redisplay, only. */ | |
2566 | |
2567 static void | |
2568 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (row) | |
2569 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2570 { | |
2571 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2572 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, TEXT_AREA); | |
2573 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2574 } | |
2575 | |
2576 | |
2577 /* Fill area AREA of glyph row ROW with spaces. To be called for | |
2578 frame-based redisplay only. */ | |
2579 | |
2580 static void | |
2581 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, area) | |
2582 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2583 int area; | |
2584 { | |
2585 if (row->glyphs[area] < row->glyphs[area + 1]) | |
2586 { | |
2587 struct glyph *end = row->glyphs[area + 1]; | |
2588 struct glyph *text = row->glyphs[area] + row->used[area]; | |
2589 | |
2590 while (text < end) | |
2591 *text++ = space_glyph; | |
2592 row->used[area] = text - row->glyphs[area]; | |
2593 } | |
2594 } | |
2595 | |
2596 | |
2597 /* Add spaces to the end of ROW in a frame matrix until index UPTO is | |
2598 reached. In frame matrices only one area, TEXT_AREA, is used. */ | |
2599 | |
2600 static void | |
2601 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (row, upto) | |
2602 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2603 int upto; | |
2604 { | |
2605 int i = row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2606 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2607 | |
2608 while (i < upto) | |
2609 glyph[i++] = space_glyph; | |
2610 | |
2611 row->used[TEXT_AREA] = i; | |
2612 } | |
2613 | |
2614 | |
2615 | |
2616 /********************************************************************** | |
2617 Mirroring operations on frame matrices in window matrices | |
2618 **********************************************************************/ | |
2619 | |
2620 /* Set frame being updated via frame-based redisplay to F. This | |
2621 function must be called before updates to make explicit that we are | |
2622 working on frame matrices or not. */ | |
2623 | |
2624 static INLINE void | |
2625 set_frame_matrix_frame (f) | |
2626 struct frame *f; | |
2627 { | |
2628 frame_matrix_frame = f; | |
2629 } | |
2630 | |
2631 | |
2632 /* Make sure glyph row ROW in CURRENT_MATRIX is up to date. | |
2633 DESIRED_MATRIX is the desired matrix corresponding to | |
2634 CURRENT_MATRIX. The update is done by exchanging glyph pointers | |
2635 between rows in CURRENT_MATRIX and DESIRED_MATRIX. If | |
2636 frame_matrix_frame is non-null, this indicates that the exchange is | |
2637 done in frame matrices, and that we have to perform analogous | |
2638 operations in window matrices of frame_matrix_frame. */ | |
2639 | |
2640 static INLINE void | |
2641 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, row) | |
2642 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix, *current_matrix; | |
2643 int row; | |
2644 { | |
2645 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, row); | |
2646 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, row); | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
2647 int mouse_face_p = current_row->mouse_face_p; |
25012 | 2648 |
2649 /* Do current_row = desired_row. This exchanges glyph pointers | |
2650 between both rows, and does a structure assignment otherwise. */ | |
2651 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); | |
2652 | |
2653 /* Enable current_row to mark it as valid. */ | |
2654 current_row->enabled_p = 1; | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
2655 current_row->mouse_face_p = mouse_face_p; |
25012 | 2656 |
2657 /* If we are called on frame matrices, perform analogous operations | |
2658 for window matrices. */ | |
2659 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2660 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), row); | |
2661 } | |
2662 | |
2663 | |
2664 /* W is the root of a window tree. FRAME_ROW is the index of a row in | |
2665 W's frame which has been made current (by swapping pointers between | |
2666 current and desired matrix). Perform analogous operations in the | |
2667 matrices of leaf windows in the window tree rooted at W. */ | |
2668 | |
2669 static void | |
2670 mirror_make_current (w, frame_row) | |
2671 struct window *w; | |
2672 int frame_row; | |
2673 { | |
2674 while (w) | |
2675 { | |
2676 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2677 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->hchild), frame_row); | |
2678 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2679 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->vchild), frame_row); | |
2680 else | |
2681 { | |
2682 /* Row relative to window W. Don't use FRAME_TO_WINDOW_VPOS | |
2683 here because the checks performed in debug mode there | |
2684 will not allow the conversion. */ | |
2685 int row = frame_row - w->desired_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2686 | |
2687 /* If FRAME_ROW is within W, assign the desired row to the | |
2688 current row (exchanging glyph pointers). */ | |
2689 if (row >= 0 && row < w->desired_matrix->matrix_h) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2690 { |
25012 | 2691 struct glyph_row *current_row |
2692 = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, row); | |
2693 struct glyph_row *desired_row | |
2694 = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, row); | |
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2695 |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2696 if (desired_row->enabled_p) |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2697 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2698 else |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2699 swap_glyph_pointers (desired_row, current_row); |
25012 | 2700 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2701 } |
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2702 } |
25012 | 2703 |
2704 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2705 } |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2706 } |
25012 | 2707 |
2708 | |
2709 /* Perform row dance after scrolling. We are working on the range of | |
2710 lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not | |
2711 including) in MATRIX. COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each | |
2712 row I in the range 0 <= I < NLINES, the index of the original line | |
2713 to move to I. This index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= | |
2714 index < NLINES. RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each | |
2715 row 0 <= I < NLINES which is empty. | |
2716 | |
2717 This function is called from do_scrolling and do_direct_scrolling. */ | |
2718 | |
2719 void | |
2720 mirrored_line_dance (matrix, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, | |
2721 retained_p) | |
2722 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2723 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2724 int *copy_from; | |
2725 char *retained_p; | |
2726 { | |
2727 /* A copy of original rows. */ | |
2728 struct glyph_row *old_rows; | |
2729 | |
2730 /* Rows to assign to. */ | |
2731 struct glyph_row *new_rows = MATRIX_ROW (matrix, unchanged_at_top); | |
2732 | |
2733 int i; | |
2734 | |
2735 /* Make a copy of the original rows. */ | |
2736 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2737 bcopy (new_rows, old_rows, nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2738 | |
2739 /* Assign new rows, maybe clear lines. */ | |
2740 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2741 { | |
2742 int enabled_before_p = new_rows[i].enabled_p; | |
2743 | |
2744 xassert (i + unchanged_at_top < matrix->nrows); | |
2745 xassert (unchanged_at_top + copy_from[i] < matrix->nrows); | |
2746 new_rows[i] = old_rows[copy_from[i]]; | |
2747 new_rows[i].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2748 | |
2749 /* RETAINED_P is zero for empty lines. */ | |
2750 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2751 new_rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
2752 } | |
2753 | |
2754 /* Do the same for window matrices, if MATRIX Is a frame matrix. */ | |
2755 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2756 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), | |
2757 unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2758 } | |
2759 | |
2760 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2761 /* Synchronize glyph pointers in the current matrix of window W with |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2762 the current frame matrix. W must be full-width, and be on a tty |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2763 frame. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2764 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2765 static void |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2766 sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows (w) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2767 struct window *w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2768 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2769 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2770 struct glyph_row *window_row, *window_row_end, *frame_row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2771 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2772 /* Preconditions: W must be a leaf window and full-width. Its frame |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2773 must have a frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2774 xassert (NILP (w->hchild) && NILP (w->vchild)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2775 xassert (WINDOW_FULL_WIDTH_P (w)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2776 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2777 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2778 /* If W is a full-width window, glyph pointers in W's current matrix |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2779 have, by definition, to be the same as glyph pointers in the |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2780 corresponding frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2781 window_row = w->current_matrix->rows; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2782 window_row_end = window_row + w->current_matrix->nrows; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2783 frame_row = f->current_matrix->rows + XFASTINT (w->top); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2784 while (window_row < window_row_end) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2785 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2786 int area; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2787 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2788 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area <= LAST_AREA; ++area) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2789 window_row->glyphs[area] = frame_row->glyphs[area]; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2790 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2791 ++window_row, ++frame_row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2792 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2793 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2794 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2795 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2796 /* Return the window in the window tree rooted in W containing frame |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2797 row ROW. Value is null if none is found. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2798 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2799 struct window * |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2800 frame_row_to_window (w, row) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2801 struct window *w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2802 int row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2803 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2804 struct window *found = NULL; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2805 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2806 while (w && !found) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2807 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2808 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2809 found = frame_row_to_window (XWINDOW (w->hchild), row); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2810 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2811 found = frame_row_to_window (XWINDOW (w->vchild), row); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2812 else if (row >= XFASTINT (w->top) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2813 && row < XFASTINT (w->top) + XFASTINT (w->height)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2814 found = w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2815 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2816 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2817 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2818 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2819 return found; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2820 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2821 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2822 |
25012 | 2823 /* Perform a line dance in the window tree rooted at W, after |
2824 scrolling a frame matrix in mirrored_line_dance. | |
2825 | |
2826 We are working on the range of lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to | |
2827 UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not including) in W's frame matrix. | |
2828 COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each row I in the range 0 <= | |
2829 I < NLINES, the index of the original line to move to I. This | |
2830 index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= index < NLINES. | |
2831 RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each row 0 <= I < NLINES | |
2832 which is empty. */ | |
2833 | |
2834 static void | |
2835 mirror_line_dance (w, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p) | |
2836 struct window *w; | |
2837 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2838 int *copy_from; | |
2839 char *retained_p; | |
2840 { | |
2841 while (w) | |
2842 { | |
2843 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2844 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->hchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2845 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2846 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2847 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->vchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2848 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2849 else | |
2850 { | |
2851 /* W is a leaf window, and we are working on its current | |
2852 matrix m. */ | |
2853 struct glyph_matrix *m = w->current_matrix; | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2854 int i, sync_p = 0; |
25012 | 2855 struct glyph_row *old_rows; |
2856 | |
2857 /* Make a copy of the original rows of matrix m. */ | |
2858 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2859 bcopy (m->rows, old_rows, m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2860 | |
2861 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2862 { | |
2863 /* Frame relative line assigned to. */ | |
2864 int frame_to = i + unchanged_at_top; | |
2865 | |
2866 /* Frame relative line assigned. */ | |
2867 int frame_from = copy_from[i] + unchanged_at_top; | |
2868 | |
2869 /* Window relative line assigned to. */ | |
2870 int window_to = frame_to - m->matrix_y; | |
2871 | |
2872 /* Window relative line assigned. */ | |
2873 int window_from = frame_from - m->matrix_y; | |
2874 | |
2875 /* Is assigned line inside window? */ | |
2876 int from_inside_window_p | |
2877 = window_from >= 0 && window_from < m->matrix_h; | |
2878 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2879 /* Is assigned to line inside window? */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2880 int to_inside_window_p |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2881 = window_to >= 0 && window_to < m->matrix_h; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2882 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2883 if (from_inside_window_p && to_inside_window_p) |
25012 | 2884 { |
2885 /* Enabled setting before assignment. */ | |
2886 int enabled_before_p; | |
2887 | |
2888 /* Do the assignment. The enabled_p flag is saved | |
2889 over the assignment because the old redisplay did | |
2890 that. */ | |
2891 enabled_before_p = m->rows[window_to].enabled_p; | |
2892 m->rows[window_to] = old_rows[window_from]; | |
2893 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2894 | |
2895 /* If frame line is empty, window line is empty, too. */ | |
2896 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2897 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = 0; | |
2898 } | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2899 else if (to_inside_window_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2900 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2901 /* A copy between windows. This is an infrequent |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2902 case not worth optimizing. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2903 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2904 struct window *root = XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2905 struct window *w2; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2906 struct glyph_matrix *m2; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2907 int m2_from; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2908 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2909 w2 = frame_row_to_window (root, frame_to); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2910 m2 = w2->current_matrix; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2911 m2_from = frame_from - m2->matrix_y; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2912 copy_row_except_pointers (m->rows + window_to, |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2913 m2->rows + m2_from); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2914 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2915 /* If frame line is empty, window line is empty, too. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2916 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2917 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = 0; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2918 sync_p = 1; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2919 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2920 else if (from_inside_window_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2921 sync_p = 1; |
25012 | 2922 } |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2923 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2924 /* If there was a copy between windows, make sure glyph |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2925 pointers are in sync with the frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2926 if (sync_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2927 sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows (w); |
25012 | 2928 |
2929 /* Check that no pointers are lost. */ | |
2930 CHECK_MATRIX (m); | |
2931 } | |
2932 | |
2933 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2934 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2935 } | |
2936 } | |
2937 | |
2938 | |
2939 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2940 | |
2941 /* Check that window and frame matrices agree about their | |
2942 understanding where glyphs of the rows are to find. For each | |
2943 window in the window tree rooted at W, check that rows in the | |
2944 matrices of leaf window agree with their frame matrices about | |
2945 glyph pointers. */ | |
314 | 2946 |
21514 | 2947 void |
25012 | 2948 check_window_matrix_pointers (w) |
314 | 2949 struct window *w; |
2950 { | |
25012 | 2951 while (w) |
2952 { | |
2953 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2954 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2955 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2956 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2957 else | |
2958 { | |
2959 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2960 check_matrix_pointers (w->desired_matrix, f->desired_matrix); | |
2961 check_matrix_pointers (w->current_matrix, f->current_matrix); | |
2962 } | |
2963 | |
2964 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2965 } | |
2966 } | |
2967 | |
2968 | |
2969 /* Check that window rows are slices of frame rows. WINDOW_MATRIX is | |
2970 a window and FRAME_MATRIX is the corresponding frame matrix. For | |
2971 each row in WINDOW_MATRIX check that it's a slice of the | |
2972 corresponding frame row. If it isn't, abort. */ | |
2973 | |
2974 static void | |
2975 check_matrix_pointers (window_matrix, frame_matrix) | |
2976 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
2977 { | |
2978 /* Row number in WINDOW_MATRIX. */ | |
2979 int i = 0; | |
2980 | |
2981 /* Row number corresponding to I in FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2982 int j = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2983 | |
2984 /* For all rows check that the row in the window matrix is a | |
2985 slice of the row in the frame matrix. If it isn't we didn't | |
2986 mirror an operation on the frame matrix correctly. */ | |
2987 while (i < window_matrix->nrows) | |
2988 { | |
2989 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
2990 frame_matrix->rows + j)) | |
2991 abort (); | |
2992 ++i, ++j; | |
2993 } | |
2994 } | |
2995 | |
2996 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
2997 | |
2998 | |
2999 | |
3000 /********************************************************************** | |
3001 VPOS and HPOS translations | |
3002 **********************************************************************/ | |
3003 | |
3004 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
3005 | |
3006 /* Translate vertical position VPOS which is relative to window W to a | |
3007 vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
3008 | |
3009 static int | |
3010 window_to_frame_vpos (w, vpos) | |
3011 struct window *w; | |
3012 int vpos; | |
3013 { | |
3014 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
3015 | |
3016 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
3017 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
3018 vpos += XFASTINT (w->top); | |
3019 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
3020 return vpos; | |
3021 } | |
3022 | |
3023 | |
3024 /* Translate horizontal position HPOS which is relative to window W to | |
3025 a vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
3026 | |
3027 static int | |
3028 window_to_frame_hpos (w, hpos) | |
3029 struct window *w; | |
3030 int hpos; | |
3031 { | |
3032 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
3033 | |
3034 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
3035 hpos += XFASTINT (w->left); | |
3036 return hpos; | |
314 | 3037 } |
25012 | 3038 |
3039 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG */ | |
3040 | |
3041 | |
314 | 3042 |
25012 | 3043 /********************************************************************** |
3044 Redrawing Frames | |
3045 **********************************************************************/ | |
3046 | |
3047 DEFUN ("redraw-frame", Fredraw_frame, Sredraw_frame, 1, 1, 0, | |
3048 "Clear frame FRAME and output again what is supposed to appear on it.") | |
3049 (frame) | |
3050 Lisp_Object frame; | |
3051 { | |
3052 struct frame *f; | |
3053 | |
3054 CHECK_LIVE_FRAME (frame, 0); | |
3055 f = XFRAME (frame); | |
3056 | |
3057 /* Ignore redraw requests, if frame has no glyphs yet. | |
3058 (Implementation note: It still has to be checked why we are | |
3059 called so early here). */ | |
3060 if (!glyphs_initialized_initially_p) | |
3061 return Qnil; | |
3062 | |
3063 update_begin (f); | |
3064 if (FRAME_MSDOS_P (f)) | |
3065 set_terminal_modes (); | |
3066 clear_frame (); | |
3067 clear_current_matrices (f); | |
3068 update_end (f); | |
3069 fflush (stdout); | |
3070 windows_or_buffers_changed++; | |
3071 /* Mark all windows as inaccurate, so that every window will have | |
3072 its redisplay done. */ | |
3073 mark_window_display_accurate (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), 0); | |
3074 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
3075 f->garbaged = 0; | |
3076 return Qnil; | |
3077 } | |
3078 | |
3079 | |
3080 /* Redraw frame F. This is nothing more than a call to the Lisp | |
3081 function redraw-frame. */ | |
3082 | |
3083 void | |
3084 redraw_frame (f) | |
3085 struct frame *f; | |
3086 { | |
3087 Lisp_Object frame; | |
3088 XSETFRAME (frame, f); | |
3089 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3090 } | |
3091 | |
3092 | |
3093 DEFUN ("redraw-display", Fredraw_display, Sredraw_display, 0, 0, "", | |
3094 "Clear and redisplay all visible frames.") | |
3095 () | |
3096 { | |
3097 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
3098 | |
3099 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
3100 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
3101 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3102 | |
3103 return Qnil; | |
3104 } | |
3105 | |
3106 | |
3107 /* This is used when frame_garbaged is set. Call Fredraw_frame on all | |
3108 visible frames marked as garbaged. */ | |
3109 | |
3110 void | |
3111 redraw_garbaged_frames () | |
3112 { | |
3113 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
3114 | |
3115 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
3116 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame)) | |
3117 && FRAME_GARBAGED_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
3118 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3119 } | |
3120 | |
3121 | |
3122 | |
3123 /*********************************************************************** | |
3124 Direct Operations | |
3125 ***********************************************************************/ | |
3126 | |
3127 /* Try to update display and current glyph matrix directly. | |
3128 | |
3129 This function is called after a character G has been inserted into | |
3130 current_buffer. It tries to update the current glyph matrix and | |
3131 perform appropriate screen output to reflect the insertion. If it | |
3132 succeeds, the global flag redisplay_performed_directly_p will be | |
3133 set to 1, and thereby prevent the more costly general redisplay | |
3134 from running (see redisplay_internal). | |
3135 | |
3136 This function is not called for `hairy' character insertions. | |
3137 In particular, it is not called when after or before change | |
3138 functions exist, like they are used by font-lock. See keyboard.c | |
3139 for details where this function is called. */ | |
314 | 3140 |
3141 int | |
3142 direct_output_for_insert (g) | |
3143 int g; | |
3144 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
3145 register struct frame *f = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
25012 | 3146 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); |
3147 struct it it, it2; | |
3148 struct glyph_row *glyph_row; | |
3149 struct glyph *glyphs, *glyph, *end; | |
3150 int n; | |
3151 /* Non-null means that Redisplay of W is based on window matrices. */ | |
3152 int window_redisplay_p = FRAME_WINDOW_P (f); | |
3153 /* Non-null means we are in overwrite mode. */ | |
3154 int overwrite_p = !NILP (current_buffer->overwrite_mode); | |
3155 int added_width; | |
3156 struct text_pos pos; | |
3157 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
3158 | |
3159 /* Not done directly. */ | |
3160 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 0; | |
3161 | |
3162 /* Quickly give up for some common cases. */ | |
3163 if (cursor_in_echo_area | |
3164 /* Give up if fonts have changed. */ | |
3165 || fonts_changed_p | |
3166 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ | |
3167 || face_change_count | |
3168 /* Give up if cursor position not really known. */ | |
314 | 3169 || !display_completed |
25012 | 3170 /* Give up if buffer appears in two places. */ |
314 | 3171 || buffer_shared > 1 |
25012 | 3172 /* Give up if w is mini-buffer and a message is being displayed there */ |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3173 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0])) |
25012 | 3174 /* Give up for hscrolled mini-buffer because display of the prompt |
3175 is handled specially there (see display_line). */ | |
3176 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && XFASTINT (w->hscroll)) | |
3177 /* Give up if overwriting in the middle of a line. */ | |
3178 || (overwrite_p | |
3179 && PT != ZV | |
3180 && FETCH_BYTE (PT) != '\n') | |
3181 /* Give up for tabs and line ends. */ | |
3182 || g == '\t' | |
3183 || g == '\n' | |
3184 || g == '\r' | |
3185 /* Give up if unable to display the cursor in the window. */ | |
3186 || w->cursor.vpos < 0 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3187 || (glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos), |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3188 /* Can't do it in a continued line because continuation |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3189 lines would change. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3190 (glyph_row->continued_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3191 /* Can't use this method if the line overlaps others or is |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3192 overlapped by others because these other lines would |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3193 have to be redisplayed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3194 || glyph_row->overlapping_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3195 || glyph_row->overlapped_p)) |
25012 | 3196 /* Can't do it for partial width windows on terminal frames |
3197 because we can't clear to eol in such a window. */ | |
3198 || (!window_redisplay_p && !WINDOW_FULL_WIDTH_P (w))) | |
3199 return 0; | |
3200 | |
3201 /* Set up a display iterator structure for W. Glyphs will be | |
3202 produced in scratch_glyph_row. Current position is W's cursor | |
3203 position. */ | |
3204 clear_glyph_row (&scratch_glyph_row); | |
3205 SET_TEXT_POS (pos, PT, PT_BYTE); | |
28361
eccb57c44da5
(direct_output_for_insert): Use DEC_TEXT_POS
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27968
diff
changeset
|
3206 DEC_TEXT_POS (pos, !NILP (current_buffer->enable_multibyte_characters)); |
25012 | 3207 init_iterator (&it, w, CHARPOS (pos), BYTEPOS (pos), &scratch_glyph_row, |
3208 DEFAULT_FACE_ID); | |
3209 | |
3210 glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3211 if (glyph_row->mouse_face_p) |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3212 return 0; |
25012 | 3213 |
3214 /* Give up if highlighting trailing whitespace and we have trailing | |
3215 whitespace in glyph_row. We would have to remove the trailing | |
3216 whitespace face in that case. */ | |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3217 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace) |
25012 | 3218 && glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
3219 { | |
3220 struct glyph *last; | |
3221 | |
3222 last = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; | |
3223 if (last->type == STRETCH_GLYPH | |
3224 || (last->type == CHAR_GLYPH | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
3225 && last->u.ch == ' ')) |
25012 | 3226 return 0; |
3227 } | |
3228 | |
3229 /* Give up if there are overlay strings at pos. This would fail | |
3230 if the overlay string has newlines in it. */ | |
3231 if (STRINGP (it.string)) | |
3232 return 0; | |
3233 | |
3234 it.hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
3235 it.vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
3236 it.current_x = w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x; | |
3237 it.current_y = w->cursor.y; | |
3238 it.end_charpos = PT; | |
3239 it.stop_charpos = min (PT, it.stop_charpos); | |
3240 | |
3241 /* More than one display element may be returned for PT - 1 if | |
3242 (i) it's a control character which is translated into `\003' or | |
3243 `^C', or (ii) it has a display table entry, or (iii) it's a | |
3244 combination of both. */ | |
3245 delta = delta_bytes = 0; | |
3246 while (get_next_display_element (&it)) | |
3247 { | |
3248 PRODUCE_GLYPHS (&it); | |
3249 | |
3250 /* Give up if glyph doesn't fit completely on the line. */ | |
3251 if (it.current_x >= it.last_visible_x) | |
3252 return 0; | |
3253 | |
3254 /* Give up if new glyph has different ascent or descent than | |
3255 the original row, or if it is not a character glyph. */ | |
3256 if (glyph_row->ascent != it.ascent | |
3257 || glyph_row->height != it.ascent + it.descent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3258 || glyph_row->phys_ascent != it.phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3259 || glyph_row->phys_height != it.phys_ascent + it.phys_descent |
25012 | 3260 || it.what != IT_CHARACTER) |
3261 return 0; | |
3262 | |
3263 delta += 1; | |
3264 delta_bytes += it.len; | |
3265 set_iterator_to_next (&it); | |
3266 } | |
3267 | |
3268 /* Give up if we hit the right edge of the window. We would have | |
3269 to insert truncation or continuation glyphs. */ | |
3270 added_width = it.current_x - (w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x); | |
3271 if (glyph_row->pixel_width + added_width >= it.last_visible_x) | |
314 | 3272 return 0; |
3273 | |
25012 | 3274 /* Give up if there is a \t following in the line. */ |
3275 it2 = it; | |
3276 it2.end_charpos = ZV; | |
3277 it2.stop_charpos = min (it2.stop_charpos, ZV); | |
3278 while (get_next_display_element (&it2) | |
3279 && !ITERATOR_AT_END_OF_LINE_P (&it2)) | |
3280 { | |
3281 if (it2.c == '\t') | |
3282 return 0; | |
3283 set_iterator_to_next (&it2); | |
3284 } | |
3285 | |
3286 /* Number of new glyphs produced. */ | |
3287 n = it.glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3288 | |
3289 /* Start and end of glyphs in original row. */ | |
3290 glyphs = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + w->cursor.hpos; | |
3291 end = glyph_row->glyphs[1 + TEXT_AREA]; | |
3292 | |
3293 /* Make room for new glyphs, then insert them. */ | |
3294 xassert (end - glyphs - n >= 0); | |
25781
e5579bc77d9e
(direct_output_for_insert): Cast arguments to
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25735
diff
changeset
|
3295 safe_bcopy ((char *) glyphs, (char *) (glyphs + n), |
e5579bc77d9e
(direct_output_for_insert): Cast arguments to
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25735
diff
changeset
|
3296 (end - glyphs - n) * sizeof (*end)); |
25012 | 3297 bcopy (it.glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], glyphs, n * sizeof *glyphs); |
3298 glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = min (glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] + n, | |
3299 end - glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3300 | |
3301 /* Compute new line width. */ | |
3302 glyph = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3303 end = glyph + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3304 glyph_row->pixel_width = glyph_row->x; | |
3305 while (glyph < end) | |
3306 { | |
3307 glyph_row->pixel_width += glyph->pixel_width; | |
3308 ++glyph; | |
3309 } | |
3310 | |
3311 /* Increment buffer positions for glyphs following the newly | |
3312 inserted ones. */ | |
3313 for (glyph = glyphs + n; glyph < end; ++glyph) | |
26546
0f43cc91d6a5
(direct_output_for_insert): Increment glyph positions
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26499
diff
changeset
|
3314 if (glyph->charpos > 0 && BUFFERP (glyph->object)) |
25012 | 3315 glyph->charpos += delta; |
3316 | |
3317 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) > 0) | |
3318 { | |
3319 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) += delta; | |
3320 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (glyph_row) += delta_bytes; | |
3321 } | |
3322 | |
3323 /* Adjust positions in lines following the one we are in. */ | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3324 increment_matrix_positions (w->current_matrix, |
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3325 w->cursor.vpos + 1, |
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3326 w->current_matrix->nrows, |
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3327 delta, delta_bytes); |
25012 | 3328 |
3329 glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
3330 |= it.glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p; | |
3331 | |
26591
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3332 glyph_row->displays_text_p = 1; |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3333 w->window_end_vpos = make_number (max (w->cursor.vpos, |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3334 XFASTINT (w->window_end_vpos))); |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3335 |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3336 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace)) |
25012 | 3337 highlight_trailing_whitespace (it.f, glyph_row); |
3338 | |
3339 /* Write glyphs. If at end of row, we can simply call write_glyphs. | |
3340 In the middle, we have to insert glyphs. Note that this is now | |
3341 implemented for X frames. The implementation uses updated_window | |
3342 and updated_row. */ | |
3343 updated_row = glyph_row; | |
3344 update_begin (f); | |
3345 if (rif) | |
3346 { | |
3347 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3348 | |
3349 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3350 rif->write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3351 else | |
3352 rif->insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3353 } | |
3354 else | |
3355 { | |
3356 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3357 write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3358 else | |
3359 insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3360 } | |
3361 | |
3362 w->cursor.hpos += n; | |
3363 w->cursor.x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x; | |
3364 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3365 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3366 | |
3367 /* How to set the cursor differs depending on whether we are | |
3368 using a frame matrix or a window matrix. Note that when | |
3369 a frame matrix is used, cursor_to expects frame coordinates, | |
3370 and the X and Y parameters are not used. */ | |
3371 if (window_redisplay_p) | |
3372 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3373 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3374 else | |
3375 { | |
3376 int x, y; | |
3377 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3378 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3379 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3380 : 0)); | |
3381 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3382 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3383 } | |
3384 | |
3385 if (rif) | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3386 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1, 0); |
25012 | 3387 update_end (f); |
3388 updated_row = NULL; | |
3389 fflush (stdout); | |
3390 | |
3391 TRACE ((stderr, "direct output for insert\n")); | |
3392 | |
25372
acf281b41a38
(direct_output_for_insert): Set beg_unchanged
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25345
diff
changeset
|
3393 UNCHANGED_MODIFIED = MODIFF; |
acf281b41a38
(direct_output_for_insert): Set beg_unchanged
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25345
diff
changeset
|
3394 BEG_UNCHANGED = GPT - BEG; |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3395 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3396 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
3397 XSETFASTINT (w->last_modified, MODIFF); |
16195
e15e4bdcb8cc
(direct_output_for_insert): Set last_overlay_modified field in window.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16051
diff
changeset
|
3398 XSETFASTINT (w->last_overlay_modified, OVERLAY_MODIFF); |
314 | 3399 |
25012 | 3400 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3401 return 1; |
3402 } | |
3403 | |
25012 | 3404 |
3405 /* Perform a direct display update for moving PT by N positions | |
3406 left or right. N < 0 means a movement backwards. This function | |
3407 is currently only called for N == 1 or N == -1. */ | |
3408 | |
314 | 3409 int |
3410 direct_output_forward_char (n) | |
3411 int n; | |
3412 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
3413 struct frame *f = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
25012 | 3414 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); |
3415 struct glyph_row *row; | |
3416 | |
26851
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3417 /* Give up if point moved out of or into a composition. */ |
28507
b6f06a755c7d
make_number/XINT/XUINT conversions; EQ/== fixes; ==Qnil -> NILP
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
28361
diff
changeset
|
3418 if (check_point_in_composition (current_buffer, XINT (w->last_point), |
26851
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3419 current_buffer, PT)) |
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3420 return 0; |
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3421 |
25012 | 3422 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ |
3423 if (face_change_count) | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
3424 return 0; |
25012 | 3425 |
3426 /* Give up if current matrix is not up to date or we are | |
3427 displaying a message. */ | |
3428 if (!display_completed || cursor_in_echo_area) | |
3429 return 0; | |
3430 | |
3431 /* Give up if the buffer's direction is reversed. */ | |
3432 if (!NILP (XBUFFER (w->buffer)->direction_reversed)) | |
314 | 3433 return 0; |
11096
cac0367b1794
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use direct output at an overlay boundary.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
10770
diff
changeset
|
3434 |
2794
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3435 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting a region. */ |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3436 if (!NILP (Vtransient_mark_mode) && !NILP (current_buffer->mark_active)) |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3437 return 0; |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3438 |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3439 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting trailing whitespace. */ |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3440 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace)) |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3441 return 0; |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3442 |
25735
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3443 /* Give up if we are showing a message or just cleared the message |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3444 because we might need to resize the echo area window. */ |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3445 if (!NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]) || !NILP (echo_area_buffer[1])) |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3446 return 0; |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3447 |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3448 /* Give up if currently displaying a message instead of the |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3449 minibuffer contents. */ |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3450 if (XWINDOW (minibuf_window) == w |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3451 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window)) |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3452 return 0; |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3453 |
25735
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3454 /* Give up if we don't know where the cursor is. */ |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3455 if (w->cursor.vpos < 0) |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3456 return 0; |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3457 |
25012 | 3458 row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); |
3459 | |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
3460 /* Give up if PT is outside of the last known cursor row. */ |
25012 | 3461 if (PT <= MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) |
3462 || PT >= MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row)) | |
6069
07045ca8ff19
(direct_output_forward_char): Use Fget_char_property to test for invisibility.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
6068
diff
changeset
|
3463 return 0; |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
3464 |
25012 | 3465 set_cursor_from_row (w, row, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, 0, 0); |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
3466 |
25012 | 3467 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3468 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3469 |
3470 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3471 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3472 | |
3473 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3474 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3475 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3476 else | |
3477 { | |
3478 int x, y; | |
3479 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3480 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3481 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3482 : 0)); | |
3483 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3484 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3485 } | |
3486 | |
314 | 3487 fflush (stdout); |
25012 | 3488 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3489 return 1; |
3490 } | |
25012 | 3491 |
3492 | |
314 | 3493 |
25012 | 3494 /*********************************************************************** |
3495 Frame Update | |
3496 ***********************************************************************/ | |
3497 | |
3498 /* Update frame F based on the data in desired matrices. | |
3499 | |
3500 If FORCE_P is non-zero, don't let redisplay be stopped by detecting | |
3501 pending input. If INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P is non-zero, don't try | |
3502 scrolling. | |
3503 | |
3504 Value is non-zero if redisplay was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
314 | 3505 |
3506 int | |
25012 | 3507 update_frame (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p) |
3508 struct frame *f; | |
3509 int force_p; | |
3510 int inhibit_hairy_id_p; | |
3511 { | |
3512 /* 1 means display has been paused because of pending input. */ | |
3513 int paused_p; | |
3514 struct window *root_window = XWINDOW (f->root_window); | |
3515 | |
3516 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3517 { | |
3518 /* We are working on window matrix basis. All windows whose | |
3519 flag must_be_updated_p is set have to be updated. */ | |
3520 | |
3521 /* Record that we are not working on frame matrices. */ | |
3522 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3523 | |
3524 /* Update all windows in the window tree of F, maybe stopping | |
3525 when pending input is detected. */ | |
3526 update_begin (f); | |
3527 | |
3528 /* Update the menu bar on X frames that don't have toolkit | |
3529 support. */ | |
3530 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
3531 update_window (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window), 1); | |
3532 | |
3533 /* Update the tool-bar window, if present. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3534 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 3535 { |
3536 Lisp_Object tem; | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3537 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 3538 |
3539 /* Update tool-bar window. */ | |
3540 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3541 { | |
3542 update_window (w, 1); | |
3543 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3544 | |
3545 /* Swap tool-bar strings. We swap because we want to | |
3546 reuse strings. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3547 tem = f->current_tool_bar_string; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3548 f->current_tool_bar_string = f->desired_tool_bar_string; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3549 f->desired_tool_bar_string = tem; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3550 f->n_current_tool_bar_items = f->n_desired_tool_bar_items; |
25012 | 3551 |
3552 /* Swap tool-bar items. We swap because we want to | |
3553 reuse vectors. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3554 tem = f->current_tool_bar_items; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3555 f->current_tool_bar_items = f->desired_tool_bar_items; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3556 f->desired_tool_bar_items = tem; |
25012 | 3557 } |
3558 } | |
3559 | |
3560 | |
3561 /* Update windows. */ | |
3562 paused_p = update_window_tree (root_window, force_p); | |
3563 update_end (f); | |
31295
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3564 |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3565 #if 0 /* This flush is a performance bottleneck under X, |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3566 and it doesn't seem to be necessary anyway. */ |
25012 | 3567 rif->flush_display (f); |
3568 #endif | |
3569 } | |
3570 else | |
3571 { | |
3572 /* We are working on frame matrix basis. Set the frame on whose | |
3573 frame matrix we operate. */ | |
3574 set_frame_matrix_frame (f); | |
3575 | |
31295
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3576 /* Build F's desired matrix from window matrices. */ |
25012 | 3577 build_frame_matrix (f); |
3578 | |
31295
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3579 /* Update the display */ |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3580 update_begin (f); |
25012 | 3581 paused_p = update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p); |
31295
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3582 update_end (f); |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3583 |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3584 if (termscript) |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3585 fflush (termscript); |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3586 fflush (stdout); |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3587 |
25012 | 3588 /* Check window matrices for lost pointers. */ |
3589 IF_DEBUG (check_window_matrix_pointers (root_window)); | |
3590 } | |
3591 | |
3592 /* Reset flags indicating that a window should be updated. */ | |
3593 set_window_update_flags (root_window, 0); | |
31295
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3594 |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3595 display_completed = !paused_p; |
25012 | 3596 return paused_p; |
3597 } | |
3598 | |
3599 | |
3600 | |
3601 /************************************************************************ | |
3602 Window-based updates | |
3603 ************************************************************************/ | |
3604 | |
3605 /* Perform updates in window tree rooted at W. FORCE_P non-zero means | |
3606 don't stop updating when input is pending. */ | |
3607 | |
3608 static int | |
3609 update_window_tree (w, force_p) | |
3610 struct window *w; | |
3611 int force_p; | |
3612 { | |
3613 int paused_p = 0; | |
3614 | |
3615 while (w && !paused_p) | |
3616 { | |
3617 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
3618 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->hchild), force_p); | |
3619 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
3620 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->vchild), force_p); | |
3621 else if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3622 paused_p |= update_window (w, force_p); | |
3623 | |
3624 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
3625 } | |
3626 | |
3627 return paused_p; | |
3628 } | |
3629 | |
3630 | |
3631 /* Update window W if its flag must_be_updated_p is non-zero. If | |
3632 FORCE_P is non-zero, don't stop updating if input is pending. */ | |
3633 | |
3634 void | |
3635 update_single_window (w, force_p) | |
3636 struct window *w; | |
3637 int force_p; | |
3638 { | |
3639 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3640 { | |
3641 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); | |
3642 | |
3643 /* Record that this is not a frame-based redisplay. */ | |
3644 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3645 | |
3646 /* Update W. */ | |
3647 update_begin (f); | |
3648 update_window (w, force_p); | |
3649 update_end (f); | |
3650 | |
3651 /* Reset flag in W. */ | |
3652 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3653 } | |
3654 } | |
3655 | |
3656 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3657 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that are |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3658 overlapped by other rows. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3659 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3660 static void |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3661 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3662 struct window *w; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3663 int yb; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3664 { |
30165
d7ec5b3caccc
(redraw_overlapped_rows): Add missing local.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30161
diff
changeset
|
3665 int i; |
d7ec5b3caccc
(redraw_overlapped_rows): Add missing local.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30161
diff
changeset
|
3666 |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3667 /* If rows overlapping others have been changed, the rows being |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3668 overlapped have to be redrawn. This won't draw lines that have |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3669 already been drawn in update_window_line because overlapped_p in |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3670 desired rows is 0, so after row assignment overlapped_p in |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3671 current rows is 0. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3672 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3673 { |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3674 struct glyph_row *row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3675 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3676 if (!row->enabled_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3677 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3678 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3679 continue; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3680 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3681 if (row->overlapped_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3682 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3683 enum glyph_row_area area; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3684 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3685 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3686 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3687 updated_row = row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3688 updated_area = area; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3689 rif->cursor_to (i, 0, row->y, area == TEXT_AREA ? row->x : 0); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3690 if (row->used[area]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3691 rif->write_glyphs (row->glyphs[area], row->used[area]); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3692 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3693 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3694 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3695 row->overlapped_p = 0; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3696 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3697 |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3698 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3699 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3700 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3701 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3702 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3703 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3704 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that overlap |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3705 others. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3706 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3707 static void |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3708 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3709 struct window *w; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3710 int yb; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3711 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3712 int i, bottom_y; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3713 struct glyph_row *row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3714 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3715 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3716 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3717 row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3718 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3719 if (!row->enabled_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3720 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3721 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3722 continue; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3723 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3724 bottom_y = MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3725 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3726 if (row->overlapping_p && i > 0 && bottom_y < yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3727 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3728 if (row->used[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3729 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3730 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3731 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3732 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, TEXT_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3733 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3734 if (row->used[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3735 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3736 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3737 /* Record in neighbor rows that ROW overwrites part of their |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3738 display. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3739 if (row->phys_ascent > row->ascent && i > 0) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3740 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i - 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3741 if ((row->phys_height - row->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3742 > row->height - row->ascent) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3743 && bottom_y < yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3744 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i + 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3745 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3746 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3747 if (bottom_y >= yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3748 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3749 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3750 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3751 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3752 |
25012 | 3753 /* Update display of window W. FORCE_P non-zero means that we should |
3754 not stop when detecting pending input. */ | |
3755 | |
3756 static int | |
3757 update_window (w, force_p) | |
3758 struct window *w; | |
3759 int force_p; | |
3760 { | |
3761 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
3762 int paused_p; | |
3763 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
3764 extern int input_pending; | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3765 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3766 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); |
25012 | 3767 extern struct frame *updating_frame; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3768 #endif |
25012 | 3769 |
3770 /* Check that W's frame doesn't have glyph matrices. */ | |
3771 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
3772 xassert (updating_frame != NULL); | |
3773 | |
3774 /* Check pending input the first time so that we can quickly return. */ | |
3775 if (redisplay_dont_pause) | |
3776 force_p = 1; | |
3777 else | |
3778 detect_input_pending (); | |
3779 | |
3780 /* If forced to complete the update, or if no input is pending, do | |
3781 the update. */ | |
3782 if (force_p || !input_pending) | |
3783 { | |
3784 struct glyph_row *row, *end; | |
3785 struct glyph_row *mode_line_row; | |
25546 | 3786 struct glyph_row *header_line_row = NULL; |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3787 int yb, changed_p = 0, mouse_face_overwritten_p = 0; |
25012 | 3788 |
3789 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3790 yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
3791 | |
3792 /* If window has a top line, update it before everything else. | |
3793 Adjust y-positions of other rows by the top line height. */ | |
3794 row = desired_matrix->rows; | |
3795 end = row + desired_matrix->nrows - 1; | |
3796 if (row->mode_line_p) | |
25546 | 3797 header_line_row = row++; |
25012 | 3798 |
3799 /* Update the mode line, if necessary. */ | |
3800 mode_line_row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (desired_matrix); | |
3801 if (mode_line_row->mode_line_p && mode_line_row->enabled_p) | |
3802 { | |
3803 mode_line_row->y = yb; | |
3804 update_window_line (w, MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (mode_line_row, | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3805 desired_matrix), |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3806 &mouse_face_overwritten_p); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3807 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3808 } |
3809 | |
3810 /* Find first enabled row. Optimizations in redisplay_internal | |
3811 may lead to an update with only one row enabled. There may | |
3812 be also completely empty matrices. */ | |
3813 while (row < end && !row->enabled_p) | |
3814 ++row; | |
3815 | |
31825
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
3816 /* Try reusing part of the display by copying. */ |
25012 | 3817 if (row < end && !desired_matrix->no_scrolling_p) |
3818 { | |
25546 | 3819 int rc = scrolling_window (w, header_line_row != NULL); |
25012 | 3820 if (rc < 0) |
3821 { | |
3822 /* All rows were found to be equal. */ | |
3823 paused_p = 0; | |
3824 goto set_cursor; | |
3825 } | |
3826 else if (rc > 0) | |
3827 force_p = 1; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3828 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3829 } |
3830 | |
3831 /* Update the top mode line after scrolling because a new top | |
3832 line would otherwise overwrite lines at the top of the window | |
3833 that can be scrolled. */ | |
25546 | 3834 if (header_line_row && header_line_row->enabled_p) |
25012 | 3835 { |
25546 | 3836 header_line_row->y = 0; |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3837 update_window_line (w, 0, &mouse_face_overwritten_p); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3838 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3839 } |
3840 | |
3841 /* Update the rest of the lines. */ | |
3842 for (; row < end && (force_p || !input_pending); ++row) | |
31653
2554afbeb88d
(update_window): Make sure to make desired rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31295
diff
changeset
|
3843 if (row->enabled_p) |
25012 | 3844 { |
3845 int vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (row, desired_matrix); | |
3846 int i; | |
3847 | |
3848 /* We'll Have to play a little bit with when to | |
3849 detect_input_pending. If it's done too often, | |
3850 scrolling large windows with repeated scroll-up | |
3851 commands will too quickly pause redisplay. */ | |
3852 if (!force_p && vpos % preempt_count == 0) | |
3853 detect_input_pending (); | |
3854 | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3855 changed_p |= update_window_line (w, vpos, |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3856 &mouse_face_overwritten_p); |
25012 | 3857 |
3858 /* Mark all rows below the last visible one in the current | |
3859 matrix as invalid. This is necessary because of | |
3860 variable line heights. Consider the case of three | |
3861 successive redisplays, where the first displays 5 | |
3862 lines, the second 3 lines, and the third 5 lines again. | |
3863 If the second redisplay wouldn't mark rows in the | |
3864 current matrix invalid, the third redisplay might be | |
3865 tempted to optimize redisplay based on lines displayed | |
3866 in the first redisplay. */ | |
3867 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) | |
3868 for (i = vpos + 1; i < w->current_matrix->nrows - 1; ++i) | |
3869 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
3870 } | |
3871 | |
3872 /* Was display preempted? */ | |
3873 paused_p = row < end; | |
3874 | |
3875 set_cursor: | |
3876 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3877 /* Fix the appearance of overlapping(overlapped rows. */ |
25012 | 3878 if (!paused_p && !w->pseudo_window_p) |
3879 { | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3880 if (changed_p && rif->fix_overlapping_area) |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3881 { |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3882 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb); |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3883 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb); |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3884 } |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3885 |
25012 | 3886 /* Make cursor visible at cursor position of W. */ |
3887 set_window_cursor_after_update (w); | |
3888 | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3889 #if 0 /* Check that current matrix invariants are satisfied. This is |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3890 for debugging only. See the comment of check_matrix_invariants. */ |
25012 | 3891 IF_DEBUG (check_matrix_invariants (w)); |
3892 #endif | |
3893 } | |
3894 | |
3895 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
3896 /* Remember the redisplay method used to display the matrix. */ | |
3897 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); | |
3898 #endif | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3899 |
25012 | 3900 /* End of update of window W. */ |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3901 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1, mouse_face_overwritten_p); |
25012 | 3902 } |
3903 else | |
3904 paused_p = 1; | |
3905 | |
3906 clear_glyph_matrix (desired_matrix); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3907 |
25012 | 3908 return paused_p; |
3909 } | |
3910 | |
3911 | |
3912 /* Update the display of area AREA in window W, row number VPOS. | |
3913 AREA can be either LEFT_MARGIN_AREA or RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA. */ | |
3914 | |
3915 static void | |
3916 update_marginal_area (w, area, vpos) | |
3917 struct window *w; | |
3918 int area, vpos; | |
3919 { | |
3920 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
3921 | |
3922 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3923 will be relative to. */ | |
3924 updated_area = area; | |
3925 | |
3926 /* Set cursor to start of glyphs, write them, and clear to the end | |
3927 of the area. I don't think that something more sophisticated is | |
3928 necessary here, since marginal areas will not be the default. */ | |
3929 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, 0); | |
3930 if (desired_row->used[area]) | |
3931 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[area], desired_row->used[area]); | |
3932 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
3933 } | |
3934 | |
3935 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3936 /* Update the display of the text area of row VPOS in window W. |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3937 Value is non-zero if display has changed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3938 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3939 static int |
25012 | 3940 update_text_area (w, vpos) |
3941 struct window *w; | |
3942 int vpos; | |
314 | 3943 { |
25012 | 3944 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); |
3945 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3946 int changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 3947 |
3948 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3949 will be relative to. */ | |
3950 updated_area = TEXT_AREA; | |
3951 | |
3952 /* If rows are at different X or Y, or rows have different height, | |
3953 or the current row is marked invalid, write the entire line. */ | |
3954 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
3955 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
3956 || desired_row->ascent != current_row->ascent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3957 || desired_row->phys_ascent != current_row->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3958 || desired_row->phys_height != current_row->phys_height |
25012 | 3959 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3960 || current_row->overlapped_p |
30307
faf4e303bab7
(update_text_area): Write the whole row if it
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30165
diff
changeset
|
3961 || current_row->mouse_face_p |
25012 | 3962 || current_row->x != desired_row->x) |
3963 { | |
3964 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, desired_row->x); | |
3965 | |
3966 if (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3967 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], | |
3968 desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3969 | |
3970 /* Clear to end of window. */ | |
3971 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3972 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3973 } |
3974 else | |
3975 { | |
3976 int stop, i, x; | |
3977 struct glyph *current_glyph = current_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3978 struct glyph *desired_glyph = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3979 | |
3980 /* If the desired row extends its face to the text area end, | |
3981 make sure we write at least one glyph, so that the face | |
3982 extension actually takes place. */ | |
3983 int desired_stop_pos = (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
3984 - (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row) | |
3985 ? 1 : 0)); | |
3986 | |
3987 stop = min (current_row->used[TEXT_AREA], desired_stop_pos); | |
3988 i = 0; | |
3989 x = desired_row->x; | |
3990 | |
3991 while (i < stop) | |
3992 { | |
3993 /* Skip over glyphs that both rows have in common. These | |
3994 don't have to be written. */ | |
3995 while (i < stop | |
3996 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph)) | |
3997 { | |
3998 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3999 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
4000 } | |
4001 | |
4002 /* Consider the case that the current row contains "xxx ppp | |
4003 ggg" in italic Courier font, and the desired row is "xxx | |
4004 ggg". The character `p' has lbearing, `g' has not. The | |
4005 loop above will stop in front of the first `p' in the | |
4006 current row. If we would start writing glyphs there, we | |
4007 wouldn't erase the lbearing of the `p'. The rest of the | |
4008 lbearing problem is then taken care of by x_draw_glyphs. */ | |
4009 if (current_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
4010 && i > 0 | |
4011 && i < current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
4012 && current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] != desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4013 { | |
4014 int left, right; | |
4015 rif->get_glyph_overhangs (current_glyph, XFRAME (w->frame), | |
4016 &left, &right); | |
4017 while (left > 0 && i > 0) | |
4018 { | |
4019 --i, --desired_glyph, --current_glyph; | |
4020 x -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
4021 left -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
4022 } | |
4023 } | |
4024 | |
4025 /* Try to avoid writing the entire rest of the desired row | |
4026 by looking for a resync point. This mainly prevents | |
4027 mode line flickering in the case the mode line is in | |
4028 fixed-pitch font, which it usually will be. */ | |
4029 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4030 { | |
4031 int start_x = x, start_hpos = i; | |
4032 struct glyph *start = desired_glyph; | |
4033 int current_x = x; | |
4034 | |
4035 /* Find the next glyph that's equal again. */ | |
4036 while (i < stop | |
4037 && !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph) | |
4038 && x == current_x) | |
4039 { | |
4040 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
4041 current_x += current_glyph->pixel_width; | |
4042 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
4043 } | |
4044 | |
4045 if (i == start_hpos || x != current_x) | |
4046 { | |
4047 i = start_hpos; | |
4048 x = start_x; | |
4049 desired_glyph = start; | |
4050 break; | |
4051 } | |
4052 | |
4053 rif->cursor_to (vpos, start_hpos, desired_row->y, start_x); | |
4054 rif->write_glyphs (start, i - start_hpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4055 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4056 } |
4057 } | |
4058 | |
4059 /* Write the rest. */ | |
4060 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4061 { | |
4062 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, x); | |
4063 rif->write_glyphs (desired_glyph, desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - i); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4064 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4065 } |
4066 | |
4067 /* Maybe clear to end of line. */ | |
4068 if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row)) | |
4069 { | |
4070 /* If new row extends to the end of the text area, nothing | |
4071 has to be cleared, if and only if we did a write_glyphs | |
4072 above. This is made sure by setting desired_stop_pos | |
4073 appropriately above. */ | |
4074 xassert (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
4075 } | |
4076 else if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (current_row)) | |
4077 { | |
4078 /* If old row extends to the end of the text area, clear. */ | |
4079 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4080 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
4081 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
4082 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4083 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4084 } |
4085 else if (desired_row->pixel_width < current_row->pixel_width) | |
4086 { | |
4087 /* Otherwise clear to the end of the old row. Everything | |
4088 after that position should be clear already. */ | |
4089 int x; | |
4090 | |
4091 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4092 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
4093 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
4094 | |
4095 /* If cursor is displayed at the end of the line, make sure | |
4096 it's cleared. Nowadays we don't have a phys_cursor_glyph | |
4097 with which to erase the cursor (because this method | |
4098 doesn't work with lbearing/rbearing), so we must do it | |
4099 this way. */ | |
4100 if (vpos == w->phys_cursor.vpos | |
4101 && w->phys_cursor.hpos >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4102 { | |
4103 w->phys_cursor_on_p = 0; | |
4104 x = -1; | |
4105 } | |
4106 else | |
4107 x = current_row->x + current_row->pixel_width; | |
4108 rif->clear_end_of_line (x); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4109 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4110 } |
4111 } | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4112 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4113 return changed_p; |
25012 | 4114 } |
4115 | |
4116 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4117 /* Update row VPOS in window W. Value is non-zero if display has been |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4118 changed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4119 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4120 static int |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4121 update_window_line (w, vpos, mouse_face_overwritten_p) |
25012 | 4122 struct window *w; |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4123 int vpos, *mouse_face_overwritten_p; |
25012 | 4124 { |
4125 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
4126 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4127 int changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 4128 |
4129 /* Set the row being updated. This is important to let xterm.c | |
4130 know what line height values are in effect. */ | |
4131 updated_row = desired_row; | |
4132 | |
31690
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4133 /* A row can be completely invisible in case a desired matrix was |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4134 built with a vscroll and then make_cursor_line_fully_visible shifts |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4135 the matrix. Make sure to make such rows current anyway, since |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4136 we need the correct y-position, for example, in the current matrix. */ |
31726
59b455472b56
(update_window_line): Make sure to always draw
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31690
diff
changeset
|
4137 if (desired_row->mode_line_p |
59b455472b56
(update_window_line): Make sure to always draw
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31690
diff
changeset
|
4138 || desired_row->visible_height > 0) |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4139 { |
31690
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4140 xassert (desired_row->enabled_p); |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4141 |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4142 /* Update display of the left margin area, if there is one. */ |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4143 if (!desired_row->full_width_p |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4144 && !NILP (w->left_margin_width)) |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4145 { |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4146 changed_p = 1; |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4147 update_marginal_area (w, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4148 } |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4149 |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4150 /* Update the display of the text area. */ |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4151 if (update_text_area (w, vpos)) |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4152 { |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4153 changed_p = 1; |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4154 if (current_row->mouse_face_p) |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4155 *mouse_face_overwritten_p = 1; |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4156 } |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4157 |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4158 /* Update display of the right margin area, if there is one. */ |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4159 if (!desired_row->full_width_p |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4160 && !NILP (w->right_margin_width)) |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4161 { |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4162 changed_p = 1; |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4163 update_marginal_area (w, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4164 } |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4165 |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4166 /* Draw truncation marks etc. */ |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4167 if (!current_row->enabled_p |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4168 || desired_row->y != current_row->y |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4169 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4170 || desired_row->overlay_arrow_p != current_row->overlay_arrow_p |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4171 || desired_row->truncated_on_left_p != current_row->truncated_on_left_p |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4172 || desired_row->truncated_on_right_p != current_row->truncated_on_right_p |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4173 || desired_row->continued_p != current_row->continued_p |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4174 || desired_row->mode_line_p != current_row->mode_line_p |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4175 || (desired_row->indicate_empty_line_p |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4176 != current_row->indicate_empty_line_p) |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4177 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (desired_row) |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4178 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (current_row))) |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4179 rif->after_update_window_line_hook (desired_row); |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4180 } |
25012 | 4181 |
4182 /* Update current_row from desired_row. */ | |
4183 make_current (w->desired_matrix, w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
4184 updated_row = NULL; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4185 return changed_p; |
25012 | 4186 } |
4187 | |
4188 | |
4189 /* Set the cursor after an update of window W. This function may only | |
4190 be called from update_window. */ | |
4191 | |
4192 static void | |
4193 set_window_cursor_after_update (w) | |
4194 struct window *w; | |
4195 { | |
4196 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
4197 int cx, cy, vpos, hpos; | |
4198 | |
4199 /* Not intended for frame matrix updates. */ | |
4200 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
4201 | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4202 if (cursor_in_echo_area |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4203 && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4204 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4205 show the cursor for the message instead. */ |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4206 && XWINDOW (minibuf_window) == w |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4207 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
25012 | 4208 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
4209 the active mini-buffer window. */ | |
4210 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) | |
4211 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) | |
4212 { | |
4213 cx = cy = vpos = hpos = 0; | |
4214 | |
4215 if (cursor_in_echo_area >= 0) | |
4216 { | |
4217 /* If the mini-buffer is several lines high, find the last | |
4218 line that has any text on it. Note: either all lines | |
4219 are enabled or none. Otherwise we wouldn't be able to | |
4220 determine Y. */ | |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4221 struct glyph_row *row, *last_row; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4222 struct glyph *glyph; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4223 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4224 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4225 last_row = NULL; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4226 for (row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, 0); |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4227 row->enabled_p; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4228 ++row) |
25012 | 4229 { |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4230 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4231 && row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA][0].charpos >= 0) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4232 last_row = row; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4233 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4234 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4235 break; |
25012 | 4236 } |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4237 |
25012 | 4238 if (last_row) |
4239 { | |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4240 struct glyph *start = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4241 struct glyph *last = start + row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4242 |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4243 while (last > start && last->charpos < 0) |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4244 --last; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4245 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4246 for (glyph = start; glyph < last; ++glyph) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4247 { |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4248 cx += glyph->pixel_width; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4249 ++hpos; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4250 } |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4251 |
25012 | 4252 cy = last_row->y; |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4253 vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (last_row, w->current_matrix); |
25012 | 4254 } |
4255 } | |
4256 } | |
4257 else | |
4258 { | |
4259 cx = w->cursor.x; | |
4260 cy = w->cursor.y; | |
4261 hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
4262 vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
4263 } | |
4264 | |
4265 /* Window cursor can be out of sync for horizontally split windows. */ | |
4266 hpos = max (0, hpos); | |
4267 hpos = min (w->current_matrix->matrix_w - 1, hpos); | |
4268 vpos = max (0, vpos); | |
4269 vpos = min (w->current_matrix->nrows - 1, vpos); | |
4270 rif->cursor_to (vpos, hpos, cy, cx); | |
4271 } | |
4272 | |
4273 | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4274 /* Set WINDOW->must_be_updated_p to ON_P for all windows in the window |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4275 tree rooted at W. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4276 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4277 void |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4278 set_window_update_flags (w, on_p) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4279 struct window *w; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4280 int on_p; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4281 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4282 while (w) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4283 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4284 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4285 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->hchild), on_p); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4286 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4287 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->vchild), on_p); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4288 else |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4289 w->must_be_updated_p = on_p; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4290 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4291 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4292 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4293 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4294 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4295 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4296 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4297 /*********************************************************************** |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4298 Window-Based Scrolling |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4299 ***********************************************************************/ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4300 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4301 /* Structure describing rows in scrolling_window. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4302 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4303 struct row_entry |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4304 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4305 /* Number of occurrences of this row in desired and current matrix. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4306 int old_uses, new_uses; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4307 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4308 /* Vpos of row in new matrix. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4309 int new_line_number; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4310 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4311 /* Bucket index of this row_entry in the hash table row_table. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4312 int bucket; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4313 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4314 /* The row described by this entry. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4315 struct glyph_row *row; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4316 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4317 /* Hash collision chain. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4318 struct row_entry *next; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4319 }; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4320 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4321 /* A pool to allocate row_entry structures from, and the size of the |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4322 pool. The pool is reallocated in scrolling_window when we find |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4323 that we need a larger one. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4324 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4325 static struct row_entry *row_entry_pool; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4326 static int row_entry_pool_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4327 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4328 /* Index of next free entry in row_entry_pool. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4329 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4330 static int row_entry_idx; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4331 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4332 /* The hash table used during scrolling, and the table's size. This |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4333 table is used to quickly identify equal rows in the desired and |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4334 current matrix. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4335 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4336 static struct row_entry **row_table; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4337 static int row_table_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4338 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4339 /* Vectors of pointers to row_entry structures belonging to the |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4340 current and desired matrix, and the size of the vectors. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4341 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4342 static struct row_entry **old_lines, **new_lines; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4343 static int old_lines_size, new_lines_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4344 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4345 /* A pool to allocate run structures from, and its size. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4346 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4347 static struct run *run_pool; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4348 static int runs_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4349 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4350 /* A vector of runs of lines found during scrolling. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4351 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4352 static struct run **runs; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4353 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4354 static struct row_entry *add_row_entry P_ ((struct window *, |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4355 struct glyph_row *)); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4356 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4357 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4358 /* Add glyph row ROW to the scrolling hash table during the scrolling |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4359 of window W. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4360 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4361 static INLINE struct row_entry * |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4362 add_row_entry (w, row) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4363 struct window *w; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4364 struct glyph_row *row; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4365 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4366 struct row_entry *entry; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4367 int i = row->hash % row_table_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4368 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4369 entry = row_table[i]; |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
4370 while (entry && !row_equal_p (w, entry->row, row, 1)) |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4371 entry = entry->next; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4372 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4373 if (entry == NULL) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4374 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4375 entry = row_entry_pool + row_entry_idx++; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4376 entry->row = row; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4377 entry->old_uses = entry->new_uses = 0; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4378 entry->new_line_number = 0; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4379 entry->bucket = i; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4380 entry->next = row_table[i]; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4381 row_table[i] = entry; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4382 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4383 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4384 return entry; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4385 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4386 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4387 |
25012 | 4388 /* Try to reuse part of the current display of W by scrolling lines. |
25546 | 4389 HEADER_LINE_P non-zero means W has a top mode line. |
25012 | 4390 |
4391 The algorithm is taken from Communications of the ACM, Apr78 "A | |
4392 Technique for Isolating Differences Between Files." It should take | |
4393 O(N) time. | |
4394 | |
4395 A short outline of the steps of the algorithm | |
4396 | |
4397 1. Skip lines equal at the start and end of both matrices. | |
4398 | |
4399 2. Enter rows in the current and desired matrix into a symbol | |
4400 table, counting how often they appear in both matrices. | |
4401 | |
4402 3. Rows that appear exactly once in both matrices serve as anchors, | |
4403 i.e. we assume that such lines are likely to have been moved. | |
4404 | |
4405 4. Starting from anchor lines, extend regions to be scrolled both | |
4406 forward and backward. | |
4407 | |
4408 Value is | |
4409 | |
4410 -1 if all rows were found to be equal. | |
4411 0 to indicate that we did not scroll the display, or | |
4412 1 if we did scroll. */ | |
4413 | |
4414 static int | |
25546 | 4415 scrolling_window (w, header_line_p) |
25012 | 4416 struct window *w; |
25546 | 4417 int header_line_p; |
25012 | 4418 { |
4419 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
4420 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
4421 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4422 int i, j, first_old, first_new, last_old, last_new; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4423 int nruns, nbytes, n, run_idx; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4424 struct row_entry *entry; |
25012 | 4425 |
4426 /* Skip over rows equal at the start. */ | |
31825
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4427 for (i = header_line_p ? 1 : 0; i < current_matrix->nrows - 1; ++i) |
25012 | 4428 { |
31825
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4429 struct glyph_row *d = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i); |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4430 struct glyph_row *c = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i); |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4431 |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4432 if (c->enabled_p |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4433 && d->enabled_p |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4434 && c->y == d->y |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4435 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (c) <= yb |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4436 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (d) <= yb |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4437 && row_equal_p (w, c, d, 1)) |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4438 { |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4439 assign_row (c, d); |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4440 d->enabled_p = 0; |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4441 } |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4442 else |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4443 break; |
25012 | 4444 } |
4445 | |
4446 /* Give up if some rows in the desired matrix are not enabled. */ | |
4447 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4448 return -1; | |
4449 | |
4450 first_old = first_new = i; | |
4451 | |
4452 /* Set last_new to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4453 desired matrix. */ | |
4454 i = first_new + 1; | |
4455 while (i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
4456 && MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4457 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) <= yb) |
25012 | 4458 ++i; |
4459 | |
4460 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4461 return 0; | |
4462 | |
4463 last_new = i; | |
4464 | |
4465 /* Set last_old to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4466 current matrix. We don't look at the enabled flag here because | |
4467 we plan to reuse part of the display even if other parts are | |
4468 disabled. */ | |
4469 i = first_old + 1; | |
4470 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4471 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) <= yb) |
25012 | 4472 ++i; |
4473 last_old = i; | |
4474 | |
4475 /* Skip over rows equal at the bottom. */ | |
4476 i = last_new; | |
4477 j = last_old; | |
4478 while (i - 1 > first_new | |
4479 && j - 1 > first_old | |
4480 && MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->enabled_p | |
4481 && (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->y | |
4482 == MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, j - 1)->y) | |
4483 && row_equal_p (w, | |
4484 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i - 1), | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
4485 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j - 1), 1)) |
25012 | 4486 --i, --j; |
4487 last_new = i; | |
4488 last_old = j; | |
4489 | |
4490 /* Nothing to do if all rows are equal. */ | |
4491 if (last_new == first_new) | |
4492 return 0; | |
4493 | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4494 /* Reallocate vectors, tables etc. if necessary. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4495 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4496 if (current_matrix->nrows > old_lines_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4497 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4498 old_lines_size = current_matrix->nrows; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4499 nbytes = old_lines_size * sizeof *old_lines; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4500 old_lines = (struct row_entry **) xrealloc (old_lines, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4501 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4502 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4503 if (desired_matrix->nrows > new_lines_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4504 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4505 new_lines_size = desired_matrix->nrows; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4506 nbytes = new_lines_size * sizeof *new_lines; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4507 new_lines = (struct row_entry **) xrealloc (new_lines, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4508 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4509 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4510 n = desired_matrix->nrows + current_matrix->nrows; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4511 if (3 * n > row_table_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4512 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4513 row_table_size = next_almost_prime (3 * n); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4514 nbytes = row_table_size * sizeof *row_table; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4515 row_table = (struct row_entry **) xrealloc (row_table, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4516 bzero (row_table, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4517 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4518 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4519 if (n > row_entry_pool_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4520 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4521 row_entry_pool_size = n; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4522 nbytes = row_entry_pool_size * sizeof *row_entry_pool; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4523 row_entry_pool = (struct row_entry *) xrealloc (row_entry_pool, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4524 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4525 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4526 if (desired_matrix->nrows > runs_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4527 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4528 runs_size = desired_matrix->nrows; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4529 nbytes = runs_size * sizeof *runs; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4530 runs = (struct run **) xrealloc (runs, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4531 nbytes = runs_size * sizeof *run_pool; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4532 run_pool = (struct run *) xrealloc (run_pool, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4533 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4534 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4535 nruns = run_idx = 0; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4536 row_entry_idx = 0; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4537 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4538 /* Add rows from the current and desired matrix to the hash table |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4539 row_hash_table to be able to find equal ones quickly. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4540 |
25012 | 4541 for (i = first_old; i < last_old; ++i) |
4542 { | |
4543 if (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4544 { | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4545 entry = add_row_entry (w, MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4546 old_lines[i] = entry; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4547 ++entry->old_uses; |
25012 | 4548 } |
4549 else | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4550 old_lines[i] = NULL; |
25012 | 4551 } |
4552 | |
4553 for (i = first_new; i < last_new; ++i) | |
4554 { | |
4555 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)); | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4556 entry = add_row_entry (w, MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4557 ++entry->new_uses; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4558 entry->new_line_number = i; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4559 new_lines[i] = entry; |
25012 | 4560 } |
4561 | |
4562 /* Identify moves based on lines that are unique and equal | |
4563 in both matrices. */ | |
4564 for (i = first_old; i < last_old;) | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4565 if (old_lines[i] |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4566 && old_lines[i]->old_uses == 1 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4567 && old_lines[i]->new_uses == 1) |
25012 | 4568 { |
4569 int j, k; | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4570 int new_line = old_lines[i]->new_line_number; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4571 struct run *run = run_pool + run_idx++; |
25012 | 4572 |
4573 /* Record move. */ | |
4574 run->current_vpos = i; | |
4575 run->current_y = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->y; | |
4576 run->desired_vpos = new_line; | |
4577 run->desired_y = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, new_line)->y; | |
4578 run->nrows = 1; | |
4579 run->height = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->height; | |
4580 | |
4581 /* Extend backward. */ | |
4582 j = i - 1; | |
4583 k = new_line - 1; | |
4584 while (j > first_old | |
4585 && k > first_new | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4586 && old_lines[j] == new_lines[k]) |
25012 | 4587 { |
4588 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4589 --run->current_vpos; | |
4590 --run->desired_vpos; | |
4591 ++run->nrows; | |
4592 run->height += h; | |
4593 run->desired_y -= h; | |
4594 run->current_y -= h; | |
4595 --j, --k; | |
4596 } | |
4597 | |
4598 /* Extend forward. */ | |
4599 j = i + 1; | |
4600 k = new_line + 1; | |
4601 while (j < last_old | |
4602 && k < last_new | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4603 && old_lines[j] == new_lines[k]) |
25012 | 4604 { |
4605 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4606 ++run->nrows; | |
4607 run->height += h; | |
4608 ++j, ++k; | |
4609 } | |
4610 | |
4611 /* Insert run into list of all runs. Order runs by copied | |
4612 pixel lines. Note that we record runs that don't have to | |
4613 be copied because they are already in place. This is done | |
4614 because we can avoid calling update_window_line in this | |
4615 case. */ | |
4616 for (j = 0; j < nruns && runs[j]->height > run->height; ++j) | |
4617 ; | |
4618 for (k = nruns; k >= j; --k) | |
4619 runs[k] = runs[k - 1]; | |
4620 runs[j] = run; | |
4621 ++nruns; | |
4622 | |
4623 i += run->nrows; | |
4624 } | |
4625 else | |
4626 ++i; | |
4627 | |
4628 /* Do the moves. Do it in a way that we don't overwrite something | |
4629 we want to copy later on. This is not solvable in general | |
4630 because there is only one display and we don't have a way to | |
4631 exchange areas on this display. Example: | |
4632 | |
4633 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4634 | A | | B | | |
4635 +-----------+ --> +-----------+ | |
4636 | B | | A | | |
4637 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4638 | |
4639 Instead, prefer bigger moves, and invalidate moves that would | |
4640 copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4641 | |
4642 for (i = 0; i < nruns; ++i) | |
4643 if (runs[i]->nrows > 0) | |
4644 { | |
4645 struct run *r = runs[i]; | |
4646 | |
4647 /* Copy on the display. */ | |
4648 if (r->current_y != r->desired_y) | |
4649 { | |
4650 rif->scroll_run_hook (w, r); | |
4651 | |
4652 /* Invalidate runs that copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4653 for (j = i + 1; j < nruns; ++j) | |
4654 { | |
4655 struct run *p = runs[j]; | |
4656 | |
4657 if ((p->current_y >= r->desired_y | |
4658 && p->current_y < r->desired_y + r->height) | |
4659 || (p->current_y + p->height >= r->desired_y | |
4660 && (p->current_y + p->height | |
4661 < r->desired_y + r->height))) | |
4662 p->nrows = 0; | |
4663 } | |
4664 } | |
4665 | |
4666 /* Assign matrix rows. */ | |
4667 for (j = 0; j < r->nrows; ++j) | |
4668 { | |
4669 struct glyph_row *from, *to; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4670 int to_overlapped_p; |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4671 |
25012 | 4672 to = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4673 from = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4674 to_overlapped_p = to->overlapped_p; |
25012 | 4675 assign_row (to, from); |
4676 to->enabled_p = 1, from->enabled_p = 0; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4677 to->overlapped_p = to_overlapped_p; |
25012 | 4678 } |
4679 } | |
4680 | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4681 /* Clear the hash table, for the next time. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4682 for (i = 0; i < row_entry_idx; ++i) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4683 row_table[row_entry_pool[i].bucket] = NULL; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4684 |
25012 | 4685 /* Value is non-zero to indicate that we scrolled the display. */ |
4686 return 1; | |
4687 } | |
4688 | |
4689 | |
4690 | |
4691 /************************************************************************ | |
4692 Frame-Based Updates | |
4693 ************************************************************************/ | |
4694 | |
4695 /* Update the desired frame matrix of frame F. | |
4696 | |
4697 FORCE_P non-zero means that the update should not be stopped by | |
4698 pending input. INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P non-zero means that scrolling | |
4699 should not be tried. | |
4700 | |
4701 Value is non-zero if update was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
4702 | |
4703 static int | |
4704 update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_id_p) | |
4705 struct frame *f; | |
4706 int force_p; | |
4707 int inhibit_id_p; | |
4708 { | |
4709 /* Frame matrices to work on. */ | |
4710 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = f->current_matrix; | |
4711 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = f->desired_matrix; | |
4712 int i; | |
314 | 4713 int pause; |
4714 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
21514 | 4715 extern int input_pending; |
25012 | 4716 |
4717 xassert (current_matrix && desired_matrix); | |
314 | 4718 |
10122
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4719 if (baud_rate != FRAME_COST_BAUD_RATE (f)) |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4720 calculate_costs (f); |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4721 |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4722 if (preempt_count <= 0) |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4723 preempt_count = 1; |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4724 |
30720
64f3338f72d8
(Qredisplay_dont_pause): New variable.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30713
diff
changeset
|
4725 if (redisplay_dont_pause) |
64f3338f72d8
(Qredisplay_dont_pause): New variable.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30713
diff
changeset
|
4726 force_p = 1; |
64f3338f72d8
(Qredisplay_dont_pause): New variable.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30713
diff
changeset
|
4727 else if (!force_p && detect_input_pending ()) |
314 | 4728 { |
4729 pause = 1; | |
4730 goto do_pause; | |
4731 } | |
4732 | |
25012 | 4733 /* If we cannot insert/delete lines, it's no use trying it. */ |
314 | 4734 if (!line_ins_del_ok) |
25012 | 4735 inhibit_id_p = 1; |
7188
7da4ad9a2a8f
(update_frame): Move those assignments even farther down.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7179
diff
changeset
|
4736 |
493 | 4737 /* See if any of the desired lines are enabled; don't compute for |
25012 | 4738 i/d line if just want cursor motion. */ |
4739 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows; i++) | |
4740 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
314 | 4741 break; |
4742 | |
4743 /* Try doing i/d line, if not yet inhibited. */ | |
25012 | 4744 if (!inhibit_id_p && i < desired_matrix->nrows) |
4745 force_p |= scrolling (f); | |
314 | 4746 |
4747 /* Update the individual lines as needed. Do bottom line first. */ | |
25012 | 4748 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, desired_matrix->nrows - 1)) |
4749 update_frame_line (f, desired_matrix->nrows - 1); | |
4750 | |
4751 /* Now update the rest of the lines. */ | |
4752 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 && (force_p || !input_pending); i++) | |
314 | 4753 { |
25012 | 4754 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4755 { |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
4756 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f)) |
314 | 4757 { |
4758 /* Flush out every so many lines. | |
4759 Also flush out if likely to have more than 1k buffered | |
4760 otherwise. I'm told that some telnet connections get | |
4761 really screwed by more than 1k output at once. */ | |
4762 int outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); | |
4763 if (outq > 900 | |
4764 || (outq > 20 && ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0))) | |
4765 { | |
4766 fflush (stdout); | |
4767 if (preempt_count == 1) | |
4768 { | |
554 | 4769 #ifdef EMACS_OUTQSIZE |
4770 if (EMACS_OUTQSIZE (0, &outq) < 0) | |
314 | 4771 /* Probably not a tty. Ignore the error and reset |
25012 | 4772 * the outq count. */ |
314 | 4773 outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); |
4774 #endif | |
4775 outq *= 10; | |
7530
57c2345a9002
(update_frame): Fix test of outq and baud_rate some more.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7529
diff
changeset
|
4776 if (baud_rate <= outq && baud_rate > 0) |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4777 sleep (outq / baud_rate); |
314 | 4778 } |
4779 } | |
4780 } | |
4781 | |
16822
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4782 if ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0) |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4783 detect_input_pending (); |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4784 |
25012 | 4785 update_frame_line (f, i); |
314 | 4786 } |
4787 } | |
25012 | 4788 |
764 | 4789 pause = (i < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) ? i : 0; |
314 | 4790 |
4791 /* Now just clean up termcap drivers and set cursor, etc. */ | |
4792 if (!pause) | |
4793 { | |
12409
6e374b28ecc3
(update_frame): Pretend cursor is in echo area
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12193
diff
changeset
|
4794 if ((cursor_in_echo_area |
25012 | 4795 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4796 show the cursor for the message instead of for the |
25012 | 4797 (now hidden) mini-buffer contents. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4798 || (EQ (minibuf_window, selected_window) |
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4799 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4800 && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]))) |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4801 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
25012 | 4802 the active mini-buffer window. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4803 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) |
14459
c1d25453a95f
(update_frame): Compare FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW(f)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14286
diff
changeset
|
4804 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) |
708 | 4805 { |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4806 int top = XINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4807 int row, col; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4808 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4809 if (cursor_in_echo_area < 0) |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4810 { |
25012 | 4811 /* Negative value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4812 cursor at beginning of line. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4813 row = top; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4814 col = 0; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4815 } |
708 | 4816 else |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4817 { |
25012 | 4818 /* Positive value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4819 cursor at the end of the prompt. If the mini-buffer | |
4820 is several lines high, find the last line that has | |
4821 any text on it. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4822 row = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4823 do |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4824 { |
25012 | 4825 --row; |
4826 col = 0; | |
4827 | |
4828 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, row)) | |
4829 { | |
4830 /* Frame rows are filled up with spaces that | |
4831 must be ignored here. */ | |
4832 struct glyph_row *r = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, | |
4833 row); | |
4834 struct glyph *start = r->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4835 struct glyph *last = start + r->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4836 | |
4837 while (last > start | |
4838 && (last - 1)->charpos < 0) | |
4839 --last; | |
4840 | |
4841 col = last - start; | |
4842 } | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4843 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4844 while (row > top && col == 0); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4845 |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4846 /* Make sure COL is not out of range. */ |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4847 if (col >= FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f)) |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4848 { |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4849 /* If we have another row, advance cursor into it. */ |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4850 if (row < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4851 { |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4852 col = FRAME_LEFT_SCROLL_BAR_WIDTH (f); |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4853 row++; |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4854 } |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4855 /* Otherwise move it back in range. */ |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4856 else |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4857 col = FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f) - 1; |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4858 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4859 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4860 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4861 cursor_to (row, col); |
708 | 4862 } |
314 | 4863 else |
25012 | 4864 { |
4865 /* We have only one cursor on terminal frames. Use it to | |
4866 display the cursor of the selected window. */ | |
4867 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
29687
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4868 if (w->cursor.vpos >= 0 |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4869 /* The cursor vpos may be temporarily out of bounds |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4870 in the following situation: There is one window, |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4871 with the cursor in the lower half of it. The window |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4872 is split, and a message causes a redisplay before |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4873 a new cursor position has been computed. */ |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4874 && w->cursor.vpos < XFASTINT (w->height)) |
25012 | 4875 { |
4876 int x = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos); | |
4877 int y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
4878 | |
4879 if (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
4880 x += XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width); | |
4881 | |
4882 /* x = max (min (x, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f) - 1), 0); */ | |
4883 cursor_to (y, x); | |
4884 } | |
4885 } | |
314 | 4886 } |
4887 | |
4888 do_pause: | |
4889 | |
25012 | 4890 clear_desired_matrices (f); |
314 | 4891 return pause; |
4892 } | |
4893 | |
25012 | 4894 |
4895 /* Do line insertions/deletions on frame F for frame-based redisplay. */ | |
314 | 4896 |
21514 | 4897 int |
764 | 4898 scrolling (frame) |
25012 | 4899 struct frame *frame; |
314 | 4900 { |
4901 int unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom; | |
4902 int window_size; | |
4903 int changed_lines; | |
764 | 4904 int *old_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
4905 int *new_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
4906 int *draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4907 int *old_draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
314 | 4908 register int i; |
764 | 4909 int free_at_end_vpos = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
25012 | 4910 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
4911 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
4912 | |
4913 if (!current_matrix) | |
4914 abort (); | |
4915 | |
4916 /* Compute hash codes of all the lines. Also calculate number of | |
4917 changed lines, number of unchanged lines at the beginning, and | |
4918 number of unchanged lines at the end. */ | |
314 | 4919 changed_lines = 0; |
4920 unchanged_at_top = 0; | |
764 | 4921 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
4922 for (i = 0; i < FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); i++) | |
314 | 4923 { |
4924 /* Give up on this scrolling if some old lines are not enabled. */ | |
25012 | 4925 if (!MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4926 return 0; |
25012 | 4927 old_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); |
4928 if (! MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4929 { |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4930 /* This line cannot be redrawn, so don't let scrolling mess it. */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4931 new_hash[i] = old_hash[i]; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4932 #define INFINITY 1000000 /* Taken from scroll.c */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4933 draw_cost[i] = INFINITY; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4934 } |
314 | 4935 else |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4936 { |
25012 | 4937 new_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); |
4938 draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (desired_matrix, i); | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4939 } |
314 | 4940 |
4941 if (old_hash[i] != new_hash[i]) | |
4942 { | |
4943 changed_lines++; | |
764 | 4944 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - i - 1; |
314 | 4945 } |
4946 else if (i == unchanged_at_top) | |
4947 unchanged_at_top++; | |
25012 | 4948 old_draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (current_matrix, i); |
314 | 4949 } |
4950 | |
4951 /* If changed lines are few, don't allow preemption, don't scroll. */ | |
25012 | 4952 if ((!scroll_region_ok && changed_lines < baud_rate / 2400) |
764 | 4953 || unchanged_at_bottom == FRAME_HEIGHT (frame)) |
314 | 4954 return 1; |
4955 | |
764 | 4956 window_size = (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_top |
314 | 4957 - unchanged_at_bottom); |
4958 | |
4959 if (scroll_region_ok) | |
4960 free_at_end_vpos -= unchanged_at_bottom; | |
764 | 4961 else if (memory_below_frame) |
314 | 4962 free_at_end_vpos = -1; |
4963 | |
4964 /* If large window, fast terminal and few lines in common between | |
25012 | 4965 current frame and desired frame, don't bother with i/d calc. */ |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4966 if (!scroll_region_ok && window_size >= 18 && baud_rate > 2400 |
314 | 4967 && (window_size >= |
4968 10 * scrolling_max_lines_saved (unchanged_at_top, | |
764 | 4969 FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 4970 old_hash, new_hash, draw_cost))) |
4971 return 0; | |
4972 | |
25012 | 4973 if (window_size < 2) |
4974 return 0; | |
4975 | |
764 | 4976 scrolling_1 (frame, window_size, unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 4977 draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4978 old_draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
314 | 4979 old_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
4980 new_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, | |
4981 free_at_end_vpos - unchanged_at_top); | |
4982 | |
4983 return 0; | |
4984 } | |
25012 | 4985 |
4986 | |
4987 /* Count the number of blanks at the start of the vector of glyphs R | |
4988 which is LEN glyphs long. */ | |
4989 | |
4990 static int | |
4991 count_blanks (r, len) | |
4992 struct glyph *r; | |
4993 int len; | |
314 | 4994 { |
25012 | 4995 int i; |
4996 | |
4997 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
4998 if (!CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (r[i])) | |
4999 break; | |
5000 | |
5001 return i; | |
314 | 5002 } |
25012 | 5003 |
5004 | |
5005 /* Count the number of glyphs in common at the start of the glyph | |
5006 vectors STR1 and STR2. END1 is the end of STR1 and END2 is the end | |
5007 of STR2. Value is the number of equal glyphs equal at the start. */ | |
314 | 5008 |
5009 static int | |
25012 | 5010 count_match (str1, end1, str2, end2) |
5011 struct glyph *str1, *end1, *str2, *end2; | |
314 | 5012 { |
25012 | 5013 struct glyph *p1 = str1; |
5014 struct glyph *p2 = str2; | |
5015 | |
5016 while (p1 < end1 | |
5017 && p2 < end2 | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
5018 && GLYPH_CHAR_AND_FACE_EQUAL_P (p1, p2)) |
25012 | 5019 ++p1, ++p2; |
5020 | |
5021 return p1 - str1; | |
314 | 5022 } |
5023 | |
25012 | 5024 |
314 | 5025 /* Char insertion/deletion cost vector, from term.c */ |
25012 | 5026 |
314 | 5027 extern int *char_ins_del_vector; |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
5028 #define char_ins_del_cost(f) (&char_ins_del_vector[FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH((f))]) |
314 | 5029 |
25012 | 5030 |
5031 /* Perform a frame-based update on line VPOS in frame FRAME. */ | |
5032 | |
314 | 5033 static void |
25012 | 5034 update_frame_line (frame, vpos) |
5035 register struct frame *frame; | |
314 | 5036 int vpos; |
5037 { | |
25012 | 5038 struct glyph *obody, *nbody, *op1, *op2, *np1, *nend; |
314 | 5039 int tem; |
5040 int osp, nsp, begmatch, endmatch, olen, nlen; | |
25012 | 5041 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
5042 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
5043 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, vpos); | |
5044 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, vpos); | |
5045 int must_write_whole_line_p; | |
5046 | |
5047 if (desired_row->inverse_p | |
5048 != (current_row->enabled_p && current_row->inverse_p)) | |
314 | 5049 { |
25012 | 5050 int n = current_row->enabled_p ? current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] : 0; |
5051 change_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos, vpos, n); | |
5052 current_row->enabled_p = 0; | |
314 | 5053 } |
5054 else | |
25012 | 5055 reassert_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos); |
5056 | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5057 /* Current row not enabled means it has unknown contents. We must |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5058 write the whole desired line in that case. */ |
25012 | 5059 must_write_whole_line_p = !current_row->enabled_p; |
5060 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
314 | 5061 { |
25012 | 5062 obody = 0; |
314 | 5063 olen = 0; |
5064 } | |
5065 else | |
5066 { | |
25012 | 5067 obody = MATRIX_ROW_GLYPH_START (current_matrix, vpos); |
5068 olen = current_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5069 | |
5070 if (! current_row->inverse_p) | |
314 | 5071 { |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5072 /* Ignore trailing spaces, if we can. */ |
314 | 5073 if (!must_write_spaces) |
25012 | 5074 while (olen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (obody[olen-1])) |
314 | 5075 olen--; |
5076 } | |
5077 else | |
5078 { | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5079 /* For an inverse-video line, make sure it's filled with |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5080 spaces all the way to the frame edge so that the reverse |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5081 video extends all the way across. */ |
25012 | 5082 while (olen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) |
5083 obody[olen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 5084 } |
5085 } | |
5086 | |
25012 | 5087 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
5088 current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5089 current_row->inverse_p = desired_row->inverse_p; | |
5090 | |
5091 /* If desired line is empty, just clear the line. */ | |
5092 if (!desired_row->enabled_p) | |
314 | 5093 { |
5094 nlen = 0; | |
5095 goto just_erase; | |
5096 } | |
5097 | |
25012 | 5098 nbody = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
5099 nlen = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5100 nend = nbody + nlen; | |
5101 | |
5102 /* If display line has unknown contents, write the whole line. */ | |
5103 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
5104 { | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5105 /* Ignore spaces at the end, if we can. */ |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5106 if (!must_write_spaces) |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5107 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5108 --nlen; |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5109 |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5110 /* Write the contents of the desired line. */ |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5111 if (nlen) |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5112 { |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5113 cursor_to (vpos, 0); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5114 write_glyphs (nbody, nlen); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5115 } |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5116 |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5117 /* Don't call clear_end_of_line if we already wrote the whole |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5118 line. The cursor will not be at the right margin in that |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5119 case but in the line below. */ |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5120 if (nlen < FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5121 { |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5122 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5123 clear_end_of_line (FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5124 } |
28682
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5125 else |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5126 /* Make sure we are in the right row, otherwise cursor movement |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5127 with cmgoto might use `ch' in the wrong row. */ |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5128 cursor_to (vpos, 0); |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5129 |
25012 | 5130 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
5131 return; | |
5132 } | |
314 | 5133 |
5134 /* Pretend trailing spaces are not there at all, | |
5135 unless for one reason or another we must write all spaces. */ | |
25012 | 5136 if (!desired_row->inverse_p) |
314 | 5137 { |
5138 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
25012 | 5139 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
314 | 5140 nlen--; |
5141 } | |
5142 else | |
5143 { | |
25012 | 5144 /* For an inverse-video line, give it extra trailing spaces all |
5145 the way to the frame edge so that the reverse video extends | |
5146 all the way across. */ | |
5147 while (nlen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) | |
5148 nbody[nlen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 5149 } |
5150 | |
5151 /* If there's no i/d char, quickly do the best we can without it. */ | |
5152 if (!char_ins_del_ok) | |
5153 { | |
25012 | 5154 int i, j; |
5155 | |
5156 /* Find the first glyph in desired row that doesn't agree with | |
5157 a glyph in the current row, and write the rest from there on. */ | |
314 | 5158 for (i = 0; i < nlen; i++) |
5159 { | |
25012 | 5160 if (i >= olen || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + i, obody + i)) |
314 | 5161 { |
25012 | 5162 /* Find the end of the run of different glyphs. */ |
5163 j = i + 1; | |
5164 while (j < nlen | |
5165 && (j >= olen | |
5166 || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + j, obody + j) | |
5167 || CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[j]))) | |
5168 ++j; | |
5169 | |
5170 /* Output this run of non-matching chars. */ | |
314 | 5171 cursor_to (vpos, i); |
25012 | 5172 write_glyphs (nbody + i, j - i); |
5173 i = j - 1; | |
314 | 5174 |
5175 /* Now find the next non-match. */ | |
5176 } | |
5177 } | |
5178 | |
5179 /* Clear the rest of the line, or the non-clear part of it. */ | |
5180 if (olen > nlen) | |
5181 { | |
5182 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
5183 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
5184 } | |
5185 | |
25012 | 5186 /* Make current row = desired row. */ |
5187 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); | |
314 | 5188 return; |
5189 } | |
5190 | |
25012 | 5191 /* Here when CHAR_INS_DEL_OK != 0, i.e. we can insert or delete |
5192 characters in a row. */ | |
5193 | |
314 | 5194 if (!olen) |
5195 { | |
25012 | 5196 /* If current line is blank, skip over initial spaces, if |
5197 possible, and write the rest. */ | |
5198 if (must_write_spaces || desired_row->inverse_p) | |
5199 nsp = 0; | |
5200 else | |
5201 nsp = count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
5202 | |
314 | 5203 if (nlen > nsp) |
5204 { | |
5205 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
5206 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp, nlen - nsp); | |
5207 } | |
5208 | |
764 | 5209 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 5210 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 5211 return; |
5212 } | |
5213 | |
5214 /* Compute number of leading blanks in old and new contents. */ | |
25012 | 5215 osp = count_blanks (obody, olen); |
5216 nsp = desired_row->inverse_p ? 0 : count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
5217 | |
5218 /* Compute number of matching chars starting with first non-blank. */ | |
5219 begmatch = count_match (obody + osp, obody + olen, | |
5220 nbody + nsp, nbody + nlen); | |
314 | 5221 |
5222 /* Spaces in new match implicit space past the end of old. */ | |
5223 /* A bug causing this to be a no-op was fixed in 18.29. */ | |
5224 if (!must_write_spaces && osp + begmatch == olen) | |
5225 { | |
5226 np1 = nbody + nsp; | |
25012 | 5227 while (np1 + begmatch < nend && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (np1[begmatch])) |
5228 ++begmatch; | |
314 | 5229 } |
5230 | |
5231 /* Avoid doing insert/delete char | |
5232 just cause number of leading spaces differs | |
25012 | 5233 when the following text does not match. */ |
314 | 5234 if (begmatch == 0 && osp != nsp) |
5235 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
5236 | |
5237 /* Find matching characters at end of line */ | |
5238 op1 = obody + olen; | |
5239 np1 = nbody + nlen; | |
5240 op2 = op1 + begmatch - min (olen - osp, nlen - nsp); | |
25012 | 5241 while (op1 > op2 |
5242 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (op1 - 1, np1 - 1)) | |
314 | 5243 { |
5244 op1--; | |
5245 np1--; | |
5246 } | |
5247 endmatch = obody + olen - op1; | |
5248 | |
5249 /* tem gets the distance to insert or delete. | |
5250 endmatch is how many characters we save by doing so. | |
5251 Is it worth it? */ | |
5252 | |
5253 tem = (nlen - nsp) - (olen - osp); | |
5254 if (endmatch && tem | |
764 | 5255 && (!char_ins_del_ok || endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[tem])) |
314 | 5256 endmatch = 0; |
5257 | |
5258 /* nsp - osp is the distance to insert or delete. | |
5259 If that is nonzero, begmatch is known to be nonzero also. | |
5260 begmatch + endmatch is how much we save by doing the ins/del. | |
5261 Is it worth it? */ | |
5262 | |
5263 if (nsp != osp | |
5264 && (!char_ins_del_ok | |
764 | 5265 || begmatch + endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[nsp - osp])) |
314 | 5266 { |
5267 begmatch = 0; | |
5268 endmatch = 0; | |
5269 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
5270 } | |
5271 | |
5272 /* Now go through the line, inserting, writing and | |
5273 deleting as appropriate. */ | |
5274 | |
5275 if (osp > nsp) | |
5276 { | |
5277 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
5278 delete_glyphs (osp - nsp); | |
5279 } | |
5280 else if (nsp > osp) | |
5281 { | |
5282 /* If going to delete chars later in line | |
5283 and insert earlier in the line, | |
5284 must delete first to avoid losing data in the insert */ | |
5285 if (endmatch && nlen < olen + nsp - osp) | |
5286 { | |
5287 cursor_to (vpos, nlen - endmatch + osp - nsp); | |
5288 delete_glyphs (olen + nsp - osp - nlen); | |
5289 olen = nlen - (nsp - osp); | |
5290 } | |
5291 cursor_to (vpos, osp); | |
25012 | 5292 insert_glyphs (0, nsp - osp); |
314 | 5293 } |
5294 olen += nsp - osp; | |
5295 | |
5296 tem = nsp + begmatch + endmatch; | |
5297 if (nlen != tem || olen != tem) | |
5298 { | |
5299 cursor_to (vpos, nsp + begmatch); | |
5300 if (!endmatch || nlen == olen) | |
5301 { | |
5302 /* If new text being written reaches right margin, | |
5303 there is no need to do clear-to-eol at the end. | |
5304 (and it would not be safe, since cursor is not | |
5305 going to be "at the margin" after the text is done) */ | |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
5306 if (nlen == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
314 | 5307 olen = 0; |
5308 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
5309 } | |
5310 else if (nlen > olen) | |
5311 { | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5312 /* Here, we used to have the following simple code: |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5313 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5314 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, olen - tem); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5315 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + olen - tem, nlen - olen); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5316 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5317 but it doesn't work if nbody[nsp + begmatch + olen - tem] |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5318 is a padding glyph. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5319 int out = olen - tem; /* Columns to be overwritten originally. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5320 int del; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5321 |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5322 /* Calculate columns we can actually overwrite. */ |
25012 | 5323 while (CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[nsp + begmatch + out])) out--; |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5324 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, out); |
25012 | 5325 /* If we left columns to be overwritten, we must delete them. */ |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5326 del = olen - tem - out; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5327 if (del > 0) delete_glyphs (del); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5328 /* At last, we insert columns not yet written out. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5329 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + out, nlen - olen + del); |
314 | 5330 olen = nlen; |
5331 } | |
5332 else if (olen > nlen) | |
5333 { | |
5334 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
5335 delete_glyphs (olen - nlen); | |
5336 olen = nlen; | |
5337 } | |
5338 } | |
5339 | |
5340 just_erase: | |
5341 /* If any unerased characters remain after the new line, erase them. */ | |
5342 if (olen > nlen) | |
5343 { | |
5344 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
5345 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
5346 } | |
5347 | |
764 | 5348 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 5349 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 5350 } |
25012 | 5351 |
5352 | |
314 | 5353 |
25012 | 5354 /*********************************************************************** |
5355 X/Y Position -> Buffer Position | |
5356 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5357 | |
5358 /* Return the character position of the character at window relative | |
5359 pixel position (*X, *Y). *X and *Y are adjusted to character | |
5360 boundaries. */ | |
5361 | |
5362 int | |
5363 buffer_posn_from_coords (w, x, y) | |
5364 struct window *w; | |
5365 int *x, *y; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5366 { |
25012 | 5367 struct it it; |
5368 struct buffer *old_current_buffer = current_buffer; | |
5369 struct text_pos startp; | |
5370 int left_area_width; | |
5371 | |
5372 current_buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
5373 SET_TEXT_POS_FROM_MARKER (startp, w->start); | |
5374 CHARPOS (startp) = min (ZV, max (BEGV, CHARPOS (startp))); | |
5375 BYTEPOS (startp) = min (ZV_BYTE, max (BEGV_BYTE, BYTEPOS (startp))); | |
5376 start_display (&it, w, startp); | |
5377 | |
5378 left_area_width = WINDOW_DISPLAY_LEFT_AREA_PIXEL_WIDTH (w); | |
5379 move_it_to (&it, -1, *x + it.first_visible_x - left_area_width, *y, -1, | |
5380 MOVE_TO_X | MOVE_TO_Y); | |
5381 | |
5382 *x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x + left_area_width; | |
5383 *y = it.current_y; | |
5384 current_buffer = old_current_buffer; | |
5385 return IT_CHARPOS (it); | |
5386 } | |
5387 | |
5388 | |
5389 /* Value is the string under window-relative coordinates X/Y in the | |
5390 mode or top line of window W, or nil if none. MODE_LINE_P non-zero | |
5391 means look at the mode line. *CHARPOS is set to the position in | |
5392 the string returned. */ | |
5393 | |
5394 Lisp_Object | |
5395 mode_line_string (w, x, y, mode_line_p, charpos) | |
5396 struct window *w; | |
30713
fee809f81f97
(mode_line_string): Declare parameter MODE_LINE_P.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30323
diff
changeset
|
5397 int x, y, mode_line_p; |
25012 | 5398 int *charpos; |
5399 { | |
5400 struct glyph_row *row; | |
5401 struct glyph *glyph, *end; | |
5402 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
5403 int x0; | |
5404 Lisp_Object string = Qnil; | |
5405 | |
5406 if (mode_line_p) | |
5407 row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); | |
5408 else | |
25546 | 5409 row = MATRIX_HEADER_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); |
25012 | 5410 |
5411 if (row->mode_line_p && row->enabled_p) | |
11919
31cb053405f2
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Record frame names
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
5412 { |
25012 | 5413 /* The mode lines are displayed over scroll bars and bitmap |
5414 areas, and X is window-relative. Correct X by the scroll bar | |
5415 and bitmap area width. */ | |
5416 if (FRAME_HAS_VERTICAL_SCROLL_BARS_ON_LEFT (f)) | |
5417 x += FRAME_SCROLL_BAR_COLS (f) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
25459
293b78b9ff60
(mode_line_string): Add FRAME_LEFT_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25385
diff
changeset
|
5418 x += FRAME_LEFT_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH (f); |
25012 | 5419 |
5420 /* Find the glyph under X. If we find one with a string object, | |
5421 it's the one we were looking for. */ | |
5422 glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5423 end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5424 for (x0 = 0; glyph < end; x0 += glyph->pixel_width, ++glyph) | |
5425 if (x >= x0 && x < x0 + glyph->pixel_width) | |
5426 { | |
5427 string = glyph->object; | |
5428 *charpos = glyph->charpos; | |
5429 break; | |
5430 } | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5431 } |
25012 | 5432 |
5433 return string; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5434 } |
25012 | 5435 |
5436 | |
5437 /*********************************************************************** | |
5438 Changing Frame Sizes | |
5439 ***********************************************************************/ | |
314 | 5440 |
5441 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
25012 | 5442 |
493 | 5443 SIGTYPE |
10745
a553a08f5785
(window_change_signal): Add ignored argument.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10259
diff
changeset
|
5444 window_change_signal (signalnum) /* If we don't have an argument, */ |
25012 | 5445 int signalnum; /* some compilers complain in signal calls. */ |
314 | 5446 { |
5447 int width, height; | |
31093
6da961dff718
Include keyboard.h before frame.h.
Andrew Innes <andrewi@gnu.org>
parents:
30720
diff
changeset
|
5448 #ifndef USE_CRT_DLL |
314 | 5449 extern int errno; |
31093
6da961dff718
Include keyboard.h before frame.h.
Andrew Innes <andrewi@gnu.org>
parents:
30720
diff
changeset
|
5450 #endif |
314 | 5451 int old_errno = errno; |
5452 | |
764 | 5453 get_frame_size (&width, &height); |
314 | 5454 |
764 | 5455 /* The frame size change obviously applies to a termcap-controlled |
5456 frame. Find such a frame in the list, and assume it's the only | |
314 | 5457 one (since the redisplay code always writes to stdout, not a |
764 | 5458 FILE * specified in the frame structure). Record the new size, |
314 | 5459 but don't reallocate the data structures now. Let that be done |
5460 later outside of the signal handler. */ | |
5461 | |
5462 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5463 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5464 |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5465 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5466 { |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5467 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
314 | 5468 { |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5469 change_frame_size (XFRAME (frame), height, width, 0, 1, 0); |
314 | 5470 break; |
5471 } | |
5472 } | |
5473 } | |
5474 | |
5475 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
5476 errno = old_errno; | |
5477 } | |
5478 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
5479 | |
5480 | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5481 /* Do any change in frame size that was requested by a signal. SAFE |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5482 non-zero means this function is called from a place where it is |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5483 safe to change frame sizes while a redisplay is in progress. */ |
314 | 5484 |
21514 | 5485 void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5486 do_pending_window_change (safe) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5487 int safe; |
314 | 5488 { |
5489 /* If window_change_signal should have run before, run it now. */ | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5490 if (redisplaying_p && !safe) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5491 return; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5492 |
314 | 5493 while (delayed_size_change) |
5494 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5495 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5496 |
5497 delayed_size_change = 0; | |
5498 | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5499 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5500 { |
25012 | 5501 struct frame *f = XFRAME (frame); |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5502 |
764 | 5503 int height = FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f); |
5504 int width = FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f); | |
314 | 5505 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5506 if (height != 0 || width != 0) |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5507 change_frame_size (f, height, width, 0, 0, safe); |
314 | 5508 } |
5509 } | |
5510 } | |
5511 | |
5512 | |
764 | 5513 /* Change the frame height and/or width. Values may be given as zero to |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5514 indicate no change is to take place. |
314 | 5515 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5516 If DELAY is non-zero, then assume we're being called from a signal |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5517 handler, and queue the change for later - perhaps the next |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5518 redisplay. Since this tries to resize windows, we can't call it |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5519 from a signal handler. |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5520 |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5521 SAFE non-zero means this function is called from a place where it's |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5522 safe to change frame sizes while a redisplay is in progress. */ |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5523 |
21514 | 5524 void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5525 change_frame_size (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe) |
25012 | 5526 register struct frame *f; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5527 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe; |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5528 { |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5529 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5530 |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5531 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5532 { |
15394
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5533 /* When using termcap, or on MS-DOS, all frames use |
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5534 the same screen, so a change in size affects all frames. */ |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5535 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5536 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5537 change_frame_size_1 (XFRAME (frame), newheight, newwidth, |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5538 pretend, delay, safe); |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5539 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5540 else |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5541 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe); |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5542 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5543 |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5544 static void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5545 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe) |
25012 | 5546 register struct frame *f; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5547 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe; |
314 | 5548 { |
16256
1ce0cb94fa68
(preserve_other_columns, preserve_my_columns): Use new
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16195
diff
changeset
|
5549 int new_frame_window_width; |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5550 int count = specpdl_ptr - specpdl; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5551 |
314 | 5552 /* If we can't deal with the change now, queue it for later. */ |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5553 if (delay || (redisplaying_p && !safe)) |
314 | 5554 { |
25012 | 5555 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5556 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = newwidth; | |
314 | 5557 delayed_size_change = 1; |
5558 return; | |
5559 } | |
5560 | |
764 | 5561 /* This size-change overrides any pending one for this frame. */ |
25012 | 5562 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = 0; |
5563 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = 0; | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5564 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5565 /* If an argument is zero, set it to the current value. */ |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5566 if (newheight == 0) |
25012 | 5567 newheight = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5568 if (newwidth == 0) |
25012 | 5569 newwidth = FRAME_WIDTH (f); |
5570 | |
5571 /* Compute width of windows in F. | |
5572 This is the width of the frame without vertical scroll bars. */ | |
5573 new_frame_window_width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH_ARG (f, newwidth); | |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5574 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5575 /* Round up to the smallest acceptable size. */ |
25012 | 5576 check_frame_size (f, &newheight, &newwidth); |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5577 |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5578 /* If we're not changing the frame size, quit now. */ |
25012 | 5579 if (newheight == FRAME_HEIGHT (f) |
5580 && new_frame_window_width == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) | |
314 | 5581 return; |
5582 | |
15078 | 5583 BLOCK_INPUT; |
5584 | |
14286
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5585 #ifdef MSDOS |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5586 /* We only can set screen dimensions to certain values supported |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5587 by our video hardware. Try to find the smallest size greater |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5588 or equal to the requested dimensions. */ |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5589 dos_set_window_size (&newheight, &newwidth); |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5590 #endif |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5591 |
25012 | 5592 if (newheight != FRAME_HEIGHT (f)) |
314 | 5593 { |
25012 | 5594 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) && !FRAME_MINIBUF_ONLY_P (f)) |
314 | 5595 { |
25012 | 5596 /* Frame has both root and mini-buffer. */ |
5597 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
5598 FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)); | |
5599 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
5600 (newheight | |
5601 - 1 | |
5602 - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)), | |
5603 0); | |
5604 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5605 newheight - 1); |
25012 | 5606 set_window_height (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), 1, 0); |
314 | 5607 } |
5608 else | |
764 | 5609 /* Frame has just one top-level window. */ |
25012 | 5610 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), |
5611 newheight - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f), 0); | |
5612 | |
5613 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5614 FrameRows = newheight; |
314 | 5615 } |
5616 | |
25012 | 5617 if (new_frame_window_width != FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) |
314 | 5618 { |
25012 | 5619 set_window_width (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); |
5620 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f)) | |
5621 set_window_width (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); | |
5622 | |
5623 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
764 | 5624 FrameCols = newwidth; |
25012 | 5625 |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
5626 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
5627 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->width, newwidth); |
314 | 5628 } |
5629 | |
25012 | 5630 FRAME_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5631 SET_FRAME_WIDTH (f, newwidth); | |
5632 | |
5633 { | |
5634 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
5635 int text_area_x, text_area_y, text_area_width, text_area_height; | |
5636 | |
5637 window_box (w, TEXT_AREA, &text_area_x, &text_area_y, &text_area_width, | |
5638 &text_area_height); | |
5639 if (w->cursor.x >= text_area_x + text_area_width) | |
5640 w->cursor.hpos = w->cursor.x = 0; | |
5641 if (w->cursor.y >= text_area_y + text_area_height) | |
5642 w->cursor.vpos = w->cursor.y = 0; | |
5643 } | |
5644 | |
5645 adjust_glyphs (f); | |
5646 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
5647 calculate_costs (f); | |
15065 | 5648 |
5649 UNBLOCK_INPUT; | |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5650 |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5651 record_unwind_protect (Fset_buffer, Fcurrent_buffer ()); |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5652 |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5653 /* This isn't quite a no-op: it runs window-configuration-change-hook. */ |
25012 | 5654 Fset_window_buffer (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f), |
5655 XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f))->buffer); | |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5656 |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5657 unbind_to (count, Qnil); |
314 | 5658 } |
25012 | 5659 |
5660 | |
314 | 5661 |
25012 | 5662 /*********************************************************************** |
5663 Terminal Related Lisp Functions | |
5664 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5665 | |
5666 DEFUN ("open-termscript", Fopen_termscript, Sopen_termscript, | |
5667 1, 1, "FOpen termscript file: ", | |
5668 "Start writing all terminal output to FILE as well as the terminal.\n\ | |
5669 FILE = nil means just close any termscript file currently open.") | |
5670 (file) | |
5671 Lisp_Object file; | |
5672 { | |
5673 if (termscript != 0) fclose (termscript); | |
5674 termscript = 0; | |
5675 | |
5676 if (! NILP (file)) | |
5677 { | |
5678 file = Fexpand_file_name (file, Qnil); | |
5679 termscript = fopen (XSTRING (file)->data, "w"); | |
5680 if (termscript == 0) | |
5681 report_file_error ("Opening termscript", Fcons (file, Qnil)); | |
5682 } | |
5683 return Qnil; | |
5684 } | |
5685 | |
5686 | |
314 | 5687 DEFUN ("send-string-to-terminal", Fsend_string_to_terminal, |
5688 Ssend_string_to_terminal, 1, 1, 0, | |
5689 "Send STRING to the terminal without alteration.\n\ | |
5690 Control characters in STRING will have terminal-dependent effects.") | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5691 (string) |
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5692 Lisp_Object string; |
314 | 5693 { |
20618
d5acac3af6e3
(Fsend_string_to_terminal): Use size_byte.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19627
diff
changeset
|
5694 /* ??? Perhaps we should do something special for multibyte strings here. */ |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5695 CHECK_STRING (string, 0); |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5696 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), stdout); |
314 | 5697 fflush (stdout); |
5698 if (termscript) | |
5699 { | |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5700 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), |
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5701 termscript); |
314 | 5702 fflush (termscript); |
5703 } | |
5704 return Qnil; | |
5705 } | |
5706 | |
25012 | 5707 |
314 | 5708 DEFUN ("ding", Fding, Sding, 0, 1, 0, |
5709 "Beep, or flash the screen.\n\ | |
5710 Also, unless an argument is given,\n\ | |
5711 terminate any keyboard macro currently executing.") | |
5712 (arg) | |
5713 Lisp_Object arg; | |
5714 { | |
493 | 5715 if (!NILP (arg)) |
314 | 5716 { |
649
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5717 if (noninteractive) |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5718 putchar (07); |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5719 else |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5720 ring_bell (); |
314 | 5721 fflush (stdout); |
5722 } | |
5723 else | |
5724 bitch_at_user (); | |
5725 | |
5726 return Qnil; | |
5727 } | |
5728 | |
21514 | 5729 void |
314 | 5730 bitch_at_user () |
5731 { | |
5732 if (noninteractive) | |
5733 putchar (07); | |
25012 | 5734 else if (!INTERACTIVE) /* Stop executing a keyboard macro. */ |
314 | 5735 error ("Keyboard macro terminated by a command ringing the bell"); |
5736 else | |
5737 ring_bell (); | |
5738 fflush (stdout); | |
5739 } | |
5740 | |
25012 | 5741 |
5742 | |
5743 /*********************************************************************** | |
5744 Sleeping, Waiting | |
5745 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5746 | |
314 | 5747 DEFUN ("sleep-for", Fsleep_for, Ssleep_for, 1, 2, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5748 "Pause, without updating display, for SECONDS seconds.\n\ |
2648 | 5749 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5750 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5751 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5752 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5753 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5754 (seconds, milliseconds) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5755 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds; |
314 | 5756 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5757 int sec, usec; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5758 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5759 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5760 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5761 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5762 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5763 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5764 | |
5765 { | |
5766 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5767 sec = (int) duration; | |
5768 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5769 } | |
314 | 5770 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5771 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5772 if (sec == 0 && usec != 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5773 error ("millisecond `sleep-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5774 #endif |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5775 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5776 /* Assure that 0 <= usec < 1000000. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5777 if (usec < 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5778 { |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5779 /* We can't rely on the rounding being correct if user is negative. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5780 if (-1000000 < usec) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5781 sec--, usec += 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5782 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5783 sec -= -usec / 1000000, usec = 1000000 - (-usec % 1000000); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5784 } |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5785 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5786 sec += usec / 1000000, usec %= 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5787 |
14646
68fe10d1abd0
(Fsleep_for): Accept sub-second intervals.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14459
diff
changeset
|
5788 if (sec < 0 || (sec == 0 && usec == 0)) |
314 | 5789 return Qnil; |
5790 | |
650 | 5791 { |
5792 Lisp_Object zero; | |
5793 | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5794 XSETFASTINT (zero, 0); |
650 | 5795 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, zero, 0); |
5796 } | |
587 | 5797 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5798 /* We should always have wait_reading_process_input; we have a dummy |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5799 implementation for systems which don't support subprocesses. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5800 #if 0 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5801 /* No wait_reading_process_input */ |
314 | 5802 immediate_quit = 1; |
5803 QUIT; | |
5804 | |
5805 #ifdef VMS | |
5806 sys_sleep (sec); | |
5807 #else /* not VMS */ | |
5808 /* The reason this is done this way | |
5809 (rather than defined (H_S) && defined (H_T)) | |
5810 is because the VMS preprocessor doesn't grok `defined' */ | |
5811 #ifdef HAVE_SELECT | |
554 | 5812 EMACS_GET_TIME (end_time); |
5813 EMACS_SET_SECS_USECS (timeout, sec, usec); | |
587 | 5814 EMACS_ADD_TIME (end_time, end_time, timeout); |
554 | 5815 |
314 | 5816 while (1) |
5817 { | |
554 | 5818 EMACS_GET_TIME (timeout); |
5819 EMACS_SUB_TIME (timeout, end_time, timeout); | |
5820 if (EMACS_TIME_NEG_P (timeout) | |
5821 || !select (1, 0, 0, 0, &timeout)) | |
314 | 5822 break; |
5823 } | |
5824 #else /* not HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5825 sleep (sec); | |
5826 #endif /* HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5827 #endif /* not VMS */ | |
5828 | |
5829 immediate_quit = 0; | |
5830 #endif /* no subprocesses */ | |
5831 | |
5832 return Qnil; | |
5833 } | |
5834 | |
25012 | 5835 |
650 | 5836 /* This is just like wait_reading_process_input, except that |
5837 it does the redisplay. | |
5838 | |
5223
db2e7e6a488e
(Fsit_for): Call prepare_menu_bars.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
5218
diff
changeset
|
5839 It's also much like Fsit_for, except that it can be used for |
11411
91bcce2fd486
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Ignore buffers whose names start with space.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
11235
diff
changeset
|
5840 waiting for input as well. */ |
650 | 5841 |
5842 Lisp_Object | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5843 sit_for (sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display) |
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5844 int sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display; |
314 | 5845 { |
650 | 5846 Lisp_Object read_kbd; |
314 | 5847 |
14964
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5848 swallow_events (display); |
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5849 |
14757
99125e1e8bac
(sit_for): Pass DISPLAY to detect_input_pending_run_timers.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14646
diff
changeset
|
5850 if (detect_input_pending_run_timers (display)) |
314 | 5851 return Qnil; |
650 | 5852 |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5853 if (initial_display) |
314 | 5854 redisplay_preserve_echo_area (); |
5855 | |
673 | 5856 if (sec == 0 && usec == 0) |
5857 return Qt; | |
5858 | |
314 | 5859 #ifdef SIGIO |
1915
98ecf99d7b1a
* dispnew.c (sit_for): Pass the correct number of arguments to
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1872
diff
changeset
|
5860 gobble_input (0); |
650 | 5861 #endif |
5862 | |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5863 XSETINT (read_kbd, reading ? -1 : 1); |
650 | 5864 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, read_kbd, display); |
5865 | |
314 | 5866 return detect_input_pending () ? Qnil : Qt; |
5867 } | |
5868 | |
25012 | 5869 |
650 | 5870 DEFUN ("sit-for", Fsit_for, Ssit_for, 1, 3, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5871 "Perform redisplay, then wait for SECONDS seconds or until input is available.\n\ |
2648 | 5872 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5873 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5874 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5875 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5876 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)\n\ | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5877 Optional third arg NODISP non-nil means don't redisplay, just wait for input.\n\ |
650 | 5878 Redisplay is preempted as always if input arrives, and does not happen\n\ |
5879 if input is available before it starts.\n\ | |
5880 Value is t if waited the full time with no input arriving.") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5881 (seconds, milliseconds, nodisp) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5882 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds, nodisp; |
650 | 5883 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5884 int sec, usec; |
650 | 5885 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5886 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5887 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5888 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5889 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5890 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5891 | |
5892 { | |
5893 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5894 sec = (int) duration; | |
5895 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5896 } | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5897 |
650 | 5898 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5899 if (usec != 0 && sec == 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5900 error ("millisecond `sit-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
650 | 5901 #endif |
5902 | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5903 return sit_for (sec, usec, 0, NILP (nodisp), NILP (nodisp)); |
650 | 5904 } |
25012 | 5905 |
5906 | |
314 | 5907 |
25012 | 5908 /*********************************************************************** |
5909 Other Lisp Functions | |
5910 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5911 | |
5912 /* A vector of size >= 2 * NFRAMES + 3 * NBUFFERS + 1, containing the | |
5913 session's frames, frame names, buffers, buffer-read-only flags, and | |
5914 buffer-modified-flags, and a trailing sentinel (so we don't need to | |
5915 add length checks). */ | |
5916 | |
5917 static Lisp_Object frame_and_buffer_state; | |
5918 | |
5919 | |
5920 DEFUN ("frame-or-buffer-changed-p", Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p, | |
5921 Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p, 0, 0, 0, | |
5922 "Return non-nil if the frame and buffer state appears to have changed.\n\ | |
5923 The state variable is an internal vector containing all frames and buffers,\n\ | |
5924 aside from buffers whose names start with space,\n\ | |
5925 along with the buffers' read-only and modified flags, which allows a fast\n\ | |
5926 check to see whether the menu bars might need to be recomputed.\n\ | |
5927 If this function returns non-nil, it updates the internal vector to reflect\n\ | |
5928 the current state.\n") | |
5929 () | |
5930 { | |
5931 Lisp_Object tail, frame, buf; | |
5932 Lisp_Object *vecp; | |
5933 int n; | |
5934 | |
5935 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5936 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5937 { | |
5938 if (!EQ (*vecp++, frame)) | |
5939 goto changed; | |
5940 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XFRAME (frame)->name)) | |
5941 goto changed; | |
5942 } | |
5943 /* Check that the buffer info matches. | |
5944 No need to test for the end of the vector | |
5945 because the last element of the vector is lambda | |
5946 and that will always cause a mismatch. */ | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5947 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5948 { |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5949 buf = XCDR (XCAR (tail)); |
25012 | 5950 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ |
5951 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5952 continue; | |
5953 if (!EQ (*vecp++, buf)) | |
5954 goto changed; | |
5955 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XBUFFER (buf)->read_only)) | |
5956 goto changed; | |
5957 if (!EQ (*vecp++, Fbuffer_modified_p (buf))) | |
5958 goto changed; | |
5959 } | |
5960 /* Detect deletion of a buffer at the end of the list. */ | |
5961 if (EQ (*vecp, Qlambda)) | |
5962 return Qnil; | |
5963 changed: | |
5964 /* Start with 1 so there is room for at least one lambda at the end. */ | |
5965 n = 1; | |
5966 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5967 n += 2; | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5968 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5969 n += 3; |
5970 /* Reallocate the vector if it's grown, or if it's shrunk a lot. */ | |
5971 if (n > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size | |
5972 || n + 20 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size / 2) | |
5973 /* Add 20 extra so we grow it less often. */ | |
5974 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (n + 20), Qlambda); | |
5975 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5976 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5977 { | |
5978 *vecp++ = frame; | |
5979 *vecp++ = XFRAME (frame)->name; | |
5980 } | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5981 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5982 { |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5983 buf = XCDR (XCAR (tail)); |
25012 | 5984 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ |
5985 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5986 continue; | |
5987 *vecp++ = buf; | |
5988 *vecp++ = XBUFFER (buf)->read_only; | |
5989 *vecp++ = Fbuffer_modified_p (buf); | |
5990 } | |
5991 /* Fill up the vector with lambdas (always at least one). */ | |
5992 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
5993 while (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
5994 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
5995 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
5996 /* Make sure we didn't overflow the vector. */ | |
5997 if (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
5998 > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
5999 abort (); | |
6000 return Qt; | |
6001 } | |
6002 | |
6003 | |
6004 | |
6005 /*********************************************************************** | |
6006 Initialization | |
6007 ***********************************************************************/ | |
6008 | |
314 | 6009 char *terminal_type; |
6010 | |
25012 | 6011 /* Initialization done when Emacs fork is started, before doing stty. |
6012 Determine terminal type and set terminal_driver. Then invoke its | |
6013 decoding routine to set up variables in the terminal package. */ | |
314 | 6014 |
21514 | 6015 void |
314 | 6016 init_display () |
6017 { | |
6018 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
6019 extern int display_arg; | |
6020 #endif | |
6021 | |
25012 | 6022 /* Construct the space glyph. */ |
6023 space_glyph.type = CHAR_GLYPH; | |
6024 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (space_glyph, ' '); | |
6025 space_glyph.charpos = -1; | |
6026 | |
314 | 6027 meta_key = 0; |
6028 inverse_video = 0; | |
6029 cursor_in_echo_area = 0; | |
6030 terminal_type = (char *) 0; | |
6031 | |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6032 /* Now is the time to initialize this; it's used by init_sys_modes |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6033 during startup. */ |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6034 Vwindow_system = Qnil; |
314 | 6035 |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6036 /* If the user wants to use a window system, we shouldn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6037 initializing the terminal. This is especially important when the |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6038 terminal is so dumb that emacs gives up before and doesn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6039 using the window system. |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6040 |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6041 If the DISPLAY environment variable is set and nonempty, |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6042 try to use X, and die with an error message if that doesn't work. */ |
314 | 6043 |
6044 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6045 if (! display_arg) |
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6046 { |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6047 char *display; |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6048 #ifdef VMS |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6049 display = getenv ("DECW$DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6050 #else |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6051 display = getenv ("DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6052 #endif |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6053 |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6054 display_arg = (display != 0 && *display != 0); |
2364 | 6055 } |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6056 |
18774
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6057 if (!inhibit_window_system && display_arg |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6058 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6059 && initialized |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6060 #endif |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6061 ) |
314 | 6062 { |
6063 Vwindow_system = intern ("x"); | |
6064 #ifdef HAVE_X11 | |
6065 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (11); | |
6066 #else | |
6067 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (10); | |
6068 #endif | |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6069 #if defined (LINUX) && defined (HAVE_LIBNCURSES) |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6070 /* In some versions of ncurses, |
15282 | 6071 tputs crashes if we have not called tgetent. |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6072 So call tgetent. */ |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6073 { char b[2044]; tgetent (b, "xterm");} |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6074 #endif |
25012 | 6075 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
314 | 6076 return; |
6077 } | |
6078 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ | |
6079 | |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6080 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6081 if (!inhibit_window_system) |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6082 { |
16589
ec300a10e407
(init_display) [HAVE_NTGUI]: Use w32 for window-system.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
16412
diff
changeset
|
6083 Vwindow_system = intern ("w32"); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6084 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (1); |
25012 | 6085 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6086 return; |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6087 } |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6088 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6089 |
314 | 6090 /* If no window system has been specified, try to use the terminal. */ |
6091 if (! isatty (0)) | |
6092 { | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
6093 fatal ("standard input is not a tty"); |
314 | 6094 exit (1); |
6095 } | |
6096 | |
6097 /* Look at the TERM variable */ | |
6098 terminal_type = (char *) getenv ("TERM"); | |
6099 if (!terminal_type) | |
6100 { | |
6101 #ifdef VMS | |
6102 fprintf (stderr, "Please specify your terminal type.\n\ | |
6103 For types defined in VMS, use set term /device=TYPE.\n\ | |
6104 For types not defined in VMS, use define emacs_term \"TYPE\".\n\ | |
6105 \(The quotation marks are necessary since terminal types are lower case.)\n"); | |
6106 #else | |
6107 fprintf (stderr, "Please set the environment variable TERM; see tset(1).\n"); | |
6108 #endif | |
6109 exit (1); | |
6110 } | |
6111 | |
6112 #ifdef VMS | |
25012 | 6113 /* VMS DCL tends to up-case things, so down-case term type. |
314 | 6114 Hardly any uppercase letters in terminal types; should be none. */ |
6115 { | |
6116 char *new = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (terminal_type) + 1); | |
6117 char *p; | |
6118 | |
6119 strcpy (new, terminal_type); | |
6120 | |
6121 for (p = new; *p; p++) | |
6122 if (isupper (*p)) | |
6123 *p = tolower (*p); | |
6124 | |
6125 terminal_type = new; | |
6126 } | |
25012 | 6127 #endif /* VMS */ |
314 | 6128 |
6129 term_init (terminal_type); | |
25012 | 6130 |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
6131 { |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
6132 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
6133 int width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
6134 int height = FRAME_HEIGHT (sf); |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
6135 |
25012 | 6136 unsigned int total_glyphs = height * (width + 2) * sizeof (struct glyph); |
6137 | |
6138 /* If these sizes are so big they cause overflow, just ignore the | |
6139 change. It's not clear what better we could do. */ | |
6140 if (total_glyphs / sizeof (struct glyph) / height != width + 2) | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
6141 fatal ("screen size %dx%d too big", width, height); |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
6142 } |
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
6143 |
25012 | 6144 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
6145 calculate_costs (XFRAME (selected_frame)); |
314 | 6146 |
6147 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
6148 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP | |
6149 if (initialized) | |
6150 #endif /* CANNOT_DUMP */ | |
6151 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
6152 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
25012 | 6153 |
6154 /* Set up faces of the initial terminal frame of a dumped Emacs. */ | |
6155 if (initialized | |
6156 && !noninteractive | |
25118
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6157 #ifdef MSDOS |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6158 /* The MSDOS terminal turns on its ``window system'' relatively |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6159 late into the startup, so we cannot do the frame faces' |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6160 initialization just yet. It will be done later by pc-win.el |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6161 and internal_terminal_init. */ |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6162 && (strcmp (terminal_type, "internal") != 0 || inhibit_window_system) |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6163 #endif |
25012 | 6164 && NILP (Vwindow_system)) |
26729
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6165 { |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6166 /* For the initial frame, we don't have any way of knowing what |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6167 are the foreground and background colors of the terminal. */ |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6168 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME(); |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6169 |
26902
264b83a3a688
Changes for separate unspecified foreground and background colors
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26851
diff
changeset
|
6170 FRAME_FOREGROUND_PIXEL (sf) = FACE_TTY_DEFAULT_FG_COLOR; |
264b83a3a688
Changes for separate unspecified foreground and background colors
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26851
diff
changeset
|
6171 FRAME_BACKGROUND_PIXEL (sf) = FACE_TTY_DEFAULT_BG_COLOR; |
26729
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6172 call0 (intern ("tty-set-up-initial-frame-faces")); |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6173 } |
314 | 6174 } |
25012 | 6175 |
6176 | |
314 | 6177 |
25012 | 6178 /*********************************************************************** |
6179 Blinking cursor | |
6180 ***********************************************************************/ | |
6181 | |
26280
083835afced5
(Finternal_show_cursor): Renamed from Fshow_cursor.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26164
diff
changeset
|
6182 DEFUN ("internal-show-cursor", Finternal_show_cursor, |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6183 Sinternal_show_cursor, 2, 2, 0, |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6184 "Set the cursor-visibility flag of WINDOW to SHOW.\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6185 WINDOW nil means use the selected window. SHOW non-nil means\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6186 show a cursor in WINDOW in the next redisplay. SHOW nil means\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6187 don't show a cursor.") |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6188 (window, show) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6189 Lisp_Object window, show; |
25012 | 6190 { |
6191 /* Don't change cursor state while redisplaying. This could confuse | |
6192 output routines. */ | |
6193 if (!redisplaying_p) | |
6194 { | |
6195 if (NILP (window)) | |
6196 window = selected_window; | |
6197 else | |
6198 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); | |
6199 | |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6200 XWINDOW (window)->cursor_off_p = NILP (show); |
25012 | 6201 } |
6202 | |
6203 return Qnil; | |
6204 } | |
6205 | |
6206 | |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6207 DEFUN ("internal-show-cursor-p", Finternal_show_cursor_p, |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6208 Sinternal_show_cursor_p, 0, 1, 0, |
26499
10af169a628b
(Finternal_show_cursor_p): Fix doc string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26334
diff
changeset
|
6209 "Value is non-nil if next redisplay will display a cursor in WINDOW.\n\ |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6210 WINDOW nil or omitted means report on the selected window.") |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6211 (window) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6212 Lisp_Object window; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6213 { |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6214 struct window *w; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6215 |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6216 if (NILP (window)) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6217 window = selected_window; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6218 else |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6219 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6220 |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6221 w = XWINDOW (window); |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6222 return w->cursor_off_p ? Qnil : Qt; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6223 } |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6224 |
25012 | 6225 |
6226 /*********************************************************************** | |
6227 Initialization | |
6228 ***********************************************************************/ | |
6229 | |
21514 | 6230 void |
314 | 6231 syms_of_display () |
6232 { | |
764 | 6233 defsubr (&Sredraw_frame); |
314 | 6234 defsubr (&Sredraw_display); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6235 defsubr (&Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p); |
314 | 6236 defsubr (&Sopen_termscript); |
6237 defsubr (&Sding); | |
6238 defsubr (&Ssit_for); | |
6239 defsubr (&Ssleep_for); | |
6240 defsubr (&Ssend_string_to_terminal); | |
26280
083835afced5
(Finternal_show_cursor): Renamed from Fshow_cursor.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26164
diff
changeset
|
6241 defsubr (&Sinternal_show_cursor); |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6242 defsubr (&Sinternal_show_cursor_p); |
314 | 6243 |
12186
6811992e871c
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Calculate vector size right.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11919
diff
changeset
|
6244 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (20), Qlambda); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6245 staticpro (&frame_and_buffer_state); |
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6246 |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6247 Qdisplay_table = intern ("display-table"); |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6248 staticpro (&Qdisplay_table); |
30720
64f3338f72d8
(Qredisplay_dont_pause): New variable.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30713
diff
changeset
|
6249 Qredisplay_dont_pause = intern ("redisplay-dont-pause"); |
64f3338f72d8
(Qredisplay_dont_pause): New variable.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30713
diff
changeset
|
6250 staticpro (&Qredisplay_dont_pause); |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6251 |
314 | 6252 DEFVAR_INT ("baud-rate", &baud_rate, |
7926
b87f2c705501
(syms_of_display): Make baud-rate a user var.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7900
diff
changeset
|
6253 "*The output baud rate of the terminal.\n\ |
314 | 6254 On most systems, changing this value will affect the amount of padding\n\ |
6255 and the other strategic decisions made during redisplay."); | |
25012 | 6256 |
314 | 6257 DEFVAR_BOOL ("inverse-video", &inverse_video, |
764 | 6258 "*Non-nil means invert the entire frame display.\n\ |
314 | 6259 This means everything is in inverse video which otherwise would not be."); |
25012 | 6260 |
314 | 6261 DEFVAR_BOOL ("visible-bell", &visible_bell, |
764 | 6262 "*Non-nil means try to flash the frame to represent a bell."); |
25012 | 6263 |
314 | 6264 DEFVAR_BOOL ("no-redraw-on-reenter", &no_redraw_on_reenter, |
764 | 6265 "*Non-nil means no need to redraw entire frame after suspending.\n\ |
314 | 6266 A non-nil value is useful if the terminal can automatically preserve\n\ |
764 | 6267 Emacs's frame display when you reenter Emacs.\n\ |
314 | 6268 It is up to you to set this variable if your terminal can do that."); |
25012 | 6269 |
314 | 6270 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system", &Vwindow_system, |
6271 "A symbol naming the window-system under which Emacs is running\n\ | |
6272 \(such as `x'), or nil if emacs is running on an ordinary terminal."); | |
25012 | 6273 |
314 | 6274 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system-version", &Vwindow_system_version, |
6275 "The version number of the window system in use.\n\ | |
6276 For X windows, this is 10 or 11."); | |
25012 | 6277 |
314 | 6278 DEFVAR_BOOL ("cursor-in-echo-area", &cursor_in_echo_area, |
6279 "Non-nil means put cursor in minibuffer, at end of any message there."); | |
25012 | 6280 |
314 | 6281 DEFVAR_LISP ("glyph-table", &Vglyph_table, |
764 | 6282 "Table defining how to output a glyph code to the frame.\n\ |
314 | 6283 If not nil, this is a vector indexed by glyph code to define the glyph.\n\ |
6284 Each element can be:\n\ | |
6285 integer: a glyph code which this glyph is an alias for.\n\ | |
6286 string: output this glyph using that string (not impl. in X windows).\n\ | |
6287 nil: this glyph mod 256 is char code to output,\n\ | |
6857 | 6288 and this glyph / 256 is face code for X windows (see `face-id')."); |
314 | 6289 Vglyph_table = Qnil; |
6290 | |
6291 DEFVAR_LISP ("standard-display-table", &Vstandard_display_table, | |
6292 "Display table to use for buffers that specify none.\n\ | |
6293 See `buffer-display-table' for more information."); | |
6294 Vstandard_display_table = Qnil; | |
6295 | |
25012 | 6296 DEFVAR_BOOL ("redisplay-dont-pause", &redisplay_dont_pause, |
6297 "*Non-nil means update isn't paused when input is detected."); | |
6298 redisplay_dont_pause = 0; | |
6299 | |
314 | 6300 /* Initialize `window-system', unless init_display already decided it. */ |
6301 #ifdef CANNOT_DUMP | |
6302 if (noninteractive) | |
6303 #endif | |
6304 { | |
6305 Vwindow_system = Qnil; | |
6306 Vwindow_system_version = Qnil; | |
6307 } | |
6308 } |